巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

yuñjitabba: {'def': '[pt.p. of yuñjati] should be joined with; should be engaged in; should be endeavoured.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yuñjitvā: {'def': '[abs. of yuñjati] having joined with; having engaged in; having endeavoured.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yā: {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.主', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.s.主', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.对', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': 'ya の f. sg. pl. nom.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(巴yā), =go=去', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f. sin. of ya), whatever woman.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': '(梵yā)﹐【字根I.】去(to go)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

yābhi: {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.夺', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.具', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}

yāc: {'def': '(巴yāc), =ask=问, 请求, 招待, 研磨', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(梵yāc)﹐【字根I.】请求(to beg)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

yāca: {'def': 'n. [＜yāc] 乞求. -yoga = yāja-yoga 乞求に応ずる, 供養に応ずる.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yācaka: {'def': 'a. m. [yāca-ka] 乞求者.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[m.] a beggar; one who requests.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yācamāna: {'def': '[pr.p. of yācati] begging; asking; entreating.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yācana: {'def': '[nt.] begging; entreaty.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yācanaka: {'def': '[adj.] begging.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'm. [=yācaka] 乞求者.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yācanta: {'def': '[pr.p. of yācati] begging; asking; entreating.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yācanā: {'def': 'yācana n. f. 乞求, 懇願.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yācati: {'def': '[〃yāc] 乞う, 求める, 乞求す. aor. yāciṃsu, ayāci, ayācisuṃ; inf. yācituṃ; ger. yāciya, yācitvā, yācitvāna; pp. yācita; caus. yāceti.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[yāc + a] begs; asks; entreats.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yācayoga: {'def': "[adj.] accessible to begging; ready to comply with another's request.", 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāci: {'def': '[aor. of yācati] begged; asked; entreated.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yācikā: {'def': '[f.] female beggar.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yācita: {'def': 'a. [yācati の pp.] 乞求せる.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[pp. of yācati] asked of; begged of.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yācitaka: {'def': 'a. n. [yācita-ka] 乞求せる, 借用せる, 借用物. -ūpamā 借用物の喻. -bhoga 借用せる財物.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yācituṃ: {'def': '[inf. of yācati] to beg; to ask; to entreat.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yācitvā: {'def': 'yāciya, yācati の ger.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[abs. of yācati] having begged; having asked; having entreated.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yād: {'def': '=unite=使联合', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

yādisa: {'def': 'yādisi a. [Sk. yādṛś, yādṛśa＜yad-dṛśa] いかなる如き, いかなる, いかに些少でも.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'yādisi a. [Sk. yādṛś, yādṛśa＜yad-dṛśa] 像什麼樣的, 如何的,怎樣的,什麼樣的 e.g. 如何的(怎樣的,什麼樣的)危險也不怕, 即使怎麼(如何,怎樣)些少也～.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '[adj.] whichever; whatever; which like.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yādisaka: {'def': 'a. [=yādisa] -tādisaka いかなるものであっても, 何にもあれ.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'a. [=yādisa] -tādisaka 即使是什麼樣的東西也～, 什麼也有, 什麼(東西)都有.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

yādisasaka: {'def': '[adj.] whichever; whatever; which like.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāga: {'def': '[m.] sacrifice; alms-giving.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'm. [＜yaj] 供犠, 犠牲, 献供祭; 供養, 施捨. -piṇḍa 供養食.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāgin: {'def': 'a. [yāga-in] 供犠する, 供養者.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāgu: {'def': '[f.] rice-gruel.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'f. [cf. Sk. yavāgū, BSk. yāgu, yvāgū] 粥, かゆ, 乳粥. -pāna 乳粥の飲物. -bhājaka 分粥人.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāhi: {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.夺', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.具', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}

yāja: {'def': 'm., yājana n. [＜yuj] 犠牲, 献供, 施捨.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yājaka: {'def': 'a. m. [＜yāja] 献供者, 司祭者.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[m.] one who causes to sacrifice.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yājetar: {'def': 'a. [＜yājeti] 司祭者, 祭主.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yājeti: {'def': '[yajati yaj の caus.] 供犠せしむ, 祭らせる. opt. yājeyya, yājeyyuṃ, yājayeyyuṃ; ger. yājetvā; ppr. yājenta.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāma: {'def': '(m.), a watch of the night; 1/3 of a night.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'm. [＜yam] 禁制, 禁戒; 夜分. -kālika 時分薬. -saṃvara 禁戒律儀.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāmakālika: {'def': '[adj.] something allowed to be taken by a Buddhist monk after noon and in the night.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': '时分药。[ 时分药：有人将之讹译为非时浆。巴利语yāma，意为时分、夜分。在此是指从一天的明相出现至第二天明相出现之间约24小时的时段（一日一夜），并非仅指非时。]：只限制比库于一天之内食用的水果汁以及未煮过的蔬菜汁。例如芒果汁、苹果汁、橙汁、香蕉汁、葡萄汁等。
世尊在《律藏·药篇》中说：
“诸比库，我允许一切果汁，除了谷果汁之外。诸比库，允许一切叶汁，除了菜汁[ 律注《普端严》解释说：这里的菜汁是指已煮熟了的菜汤。作为时限药的叶子在做成食物之前榨成的汁是允许的。]之外。诸比库，允许一切花汁，除了蜜花汁之外。诸比库，允许一切甘蔗汁。”（Mv.300）
根据律藏的注解，大型水果以及一切其他种类的谷物皆被视为是随顺于谷类的，其汁不可用来作时分药。例如椰子汁、西瓜汁、哈蜜瓜汁等。
时分药的制作方法是：由沙马内拉或在家人等未受具戒者把欲榨成汁的小果等以冷水压挤后，经过滤而成。滤过了的汁可以加进冷开水、糖或盐饮用。
任何经煮过了的蔬菜汁和水果汁皆不可在午后饮用，因为该汁一旦煮过则成了时限药。不过，放在太阳下面加温是允许的。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

yāna: {'def': '[nt.] a carriage; vehicle; going.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'n. [〃＜yā] 乗, 乗物. -kathā 車乗論. -kāra 造車師. -gata 車乗で行ける. -ṭṭha 乗物にある. -bhūmi 車乗の通る土地.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yānabhūmi: {'def': '[f.] a road accessible to a carriage.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yānagata: {'def': '[adj.] got up in a carriage.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yānaka: {'def': '[nt.] a small carriage.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'n. [＜yāna] 乗物, 車.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāni: {'def': 'ya の n. pl. nom. acc.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）n.p.主', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）n.p.对', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}

yānika: {'def': 'yāniya a. [＜yāna] 導く, 至らしめる, 習慣とせる.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yānikata: {'def': 'a. [yāna-kata] 車乗となせる, 習慣となれる, 通暁せる.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yānin: {'def': 'a. [yāna-in] 車乗ある.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yānī: {'def': '[m.] one who drives in a carriage.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yānīkata: {'def': '[adj.] made a habit of; mastered.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāpana: {'def': 'yapana n. [＜yāpeti] 生活, 生存, 存続, 保養. cf. yātra.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[nt.] sustenance; nourishment; keeping up of the body.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāpananīya: {'def': "[adj.] sufficient for supporting one's life.", 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāpanīya: {'def': 'a. [yāpeti の grd.] 生きながらえるべき, 活力ある.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāpenta: {'def': "[pr.p. of yāpeti] nourishing; keeping up; supporting one's life.", 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāpesi: {'def': "[aor. of yāpeti] nourished; kept up; supported one's life.", 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāpeti: {'def': 'yapeti [yāti の caus.] 行かしむ, 存続さす, 生存さす. grd. yāpanīya, yāpya.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': "[yā + āpe] nourishes; keeps up; supports one's life.", 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāpetvā: {'def': "[abs. of yapetvā] having nourished; having kept up; having supported one's life.", 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāpita: {'def': "[pp. of yāpeti] nourished; kept up; supported one's life.", 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāsaṃ: {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.属', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.与', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': 'yāsānaṃ, yāsu, yāhi → ya.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāsu: {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.处', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}

yāsānaṃ: {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.属', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.与', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}

yāta: {'def': '(pp. of yāti), gone; proceeded.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'a. m. [yāti の pp.] 行ける, 宿習の; 習慣. yātānuyāyin 旧慣に従う, 風習に従う.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yātave: {'def': 'yāti の inf.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāthāva: {'def': '[adj.] exact, definite.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'a. [＜yathāva] 十分の, 確実な.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāthāvato: {'def': '(adv.), exactly.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāti: {'def': '(yā + a), goes on; proceeds.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': '[〃yā cf. yāyati] 行く. pres. yāmi, yāsi, yāti, yāma, yanti; imper. yāhi, yātu, yātha; inf. yātave; ppr. yanta; pp. yāta; caus. yāpeti, yapeti.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yātrā: {'def': '(f.), travel; voyage; support of life.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'f. [〃] 旅行, よき習慣, 暮し, 活計.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yātvā: {'def': '[abs. of yāti] having gone; having proceeded.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāva: {'def': 'adv. prep. [Sk. yāvat; ya-vat. cf. tāva] ...まで, 限り, …の間は. yāva tatiyakaṃ 第三回まで. yāva jīvaṃ 寿命 (が終る)まで, 一生涯. yāva...tāva, yāva...atha, yāvakīvaṃ…tāva…の間はその間は. yāvad-atthaṃ 欲するだけ. -kālika 時薬. -jīvika 一生涯の, 尽形寿薬. -tajjanī おどしの限り, 脅威にある間.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(ind.), up to; as far as; so far that.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvad: {'def': 'eva : [ind.] only for.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvadattha: {'def': '[adj.] as much as one likes.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvadatthaṃ: {'def': '[adv.] as much as one likes; as far as need be.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvadeva: {'def': '尽…、只要', 'xr': '《巴利语字汇》 -葛印卡内观中心四念住课程开示集要附录'}

yāvajivika: {'def': '终生药。又作尽寿药。即没有规定食用期限的药品。此类药一般上是用来治病而不当食物吃用。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

yāvajīva: {'def': '[adj.] life-long.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvajīvaṃ: {'def': "[adv.] for the length of one's life.", 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvajīvika: {'def': "[adj.] existing as long as one's life lasts.", 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvaka: {'def': 'm. [=yavaka] 麦飯.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāvakālika: {'def': '时限药。限于明相出现后至日正中时之间的时段才可以食用的食物。时限药分为噉食和嚼食两类。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '[adj.] temporary.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvakīvaṃ: {'def': '(yāva-kīvaṃ)[ind.] as long as.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvant: {'def': 'pron. rel. [〃] 所のそれだけ. [cf. yāva. adv.] sg. instr. abl. yāvatā; pl. nom. yāvanto; n. yāvat. yāvañca それ程多く, いかに多く.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāvataka: {'def': 'a., yāvatikā f. [yāvat-ika] ...である限りの, それだけの [tāvataka と関連] . yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi 車乗の行ける土地のあるだけ.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[adj.] as much as; as many as; as far as.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvatatiyaṃ: {'def': '[adv.] up to the third time.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvatihaṃ: {'def': '[adv.] as many days as.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvatā: {'def': '[ind.] as far as; in comparison with.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'adv. [yāvant 的 abl.] 只有那些,以那些為限,唯有那個(那樣), ...只那(樣)...的場所(情況), 限是.... yāvatā bahu bhāsati 只有(只能,唯有)多說(多做說明?)那樣了. yāvatā ariyaṃ āyatanaṃ 是(只)限聖處.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'adv. [yāvant の abl.] ...所のそれだけで, ...である限り. yāvatā bahu bhāsati 多くを語るそれだけで. yāvatā ariyaṃ āyatanaṃ 聖処である限り.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāvatāvatihaṃ: {'def': '[adv.] as many days as.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāvatāyukaṃ: {'def': 'adv. [yāvat-āyuka の acc.] 一生涯, 寿命あるかぎり.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[(yāvatā + āyukaṃ), adv.] as long as life lasts.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yāya: {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.s.与', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': 'yāyaṃ, yāyo→ya.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.s.属', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.s.夺', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.s.具', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}

yāyati: {'def': '= yāti 行く, 駆る. opt. yāyeyya; ger. yāyitvā; ppr. sg. gen. yāyato.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāyaṃ: {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.s.处', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}

yāyin: {'def': 'a., yāyinī f. [yāya-in] 行く.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

yāyo: {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.对', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}; {'def': '关系代名词 ya（who,what,which）f.p.主', 'xr': '《巴利语入门》释性恩(Dhammajīvī)'}

yāyī: {'def': '[m.] one who goes. (in cpds.), such as sīghayāyī.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yūpa: {'def': 'm. [〃] 犠牲獣を縛る柱, 宮殿.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[m.] a sacrificial post.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yūsa: {'def': 'm. [Sk. yūṣan, yūṣa] 汁, ス一プ.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[m.] juice; soup.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yūtha: {'def': 'n. [〃] 獣群, 群. -pa 家畜主.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[m.] a flock or herd of animals.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yūthajeṭṭha: {'def': '[m.] leader of a herd.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yūthapa: {'def': '[m.] leader of a herd.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

yūthikā: {'def': 'f. [〃] 瑜底迦, 素馨, ジャスミンの一種 [yodhikā, yūdhikā, yudhikā とも書く].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

°Ga: {'def': '[fr. gam] adj., only as ending: going. See e. g. atiga, anuga, antalikkha°, ura°, pāra°, majjha°, samīpa°, hattha°. It also appears as °gu, e. g. in addha°, anta°, paṭṭha°, pāra°, veda°. -- dugga (m. & nt.) a difficult road Dh.327=Miln.379; Pv.II,7⁸ (=duggamana-ṭṭhāna PvA.102); II,9²⁵; J.II,385. (Page 239)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

°Gama: {'def': '1. adj. going, able to go; going to, leading to; in vihaṅgama going in the air Sn.221, 606; Th.I,1108: J.I,216 (cp. gamana); aghasi° id. Vv 16¹ (=vehāsaṁ° VvA.78); nabhasi° going on clouds Sn.687; nibbāna° leading to N. S.V,11; dūraṁ° going far, hadayaṁ° going to one’s heart, q. v. -- 2. m. course, going to; in atthaṁ° going home, going to rest, etc., q. v. (Page 245)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

°Gavesaka: {'def': '(adj. fr. next) looking for, seeking J.I,176 (kāraṇa°); II,3 (aguṇa°). (Page 247)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

°Gha: {'def': '(adj.-suffix to ghan) killing, destroying, see hanati. -- iṇagha at Sn.246 is v. l. SS for iṇaghāta. Cp. paṭi° & see also ghana² & ghāta. (Page 256)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

°Gāmin: {'def': '(adj.) [from gacchati, gam] f. °iṇī, in composition °gāmi°. -- (a) going, walking, lit.: sīgha° walking quickly Sn.381; -- (b) leading to, making for, usually with magga or paṭipadā (gāminī), either lit. Pāṭaliputtagāmi-magga the road to P. Miln.17; or fig. of ways & means connected w. one of the “gatis.” as apāya° DhA.III,175, udaya° paṭipadā S.V,361; nibbāna° dhamma Sn.233; amata-gāmi-magga S.V,8; udayatthagāmiṇī paññā A.V,15; dukkhanirodha° paṭipadā Vin.I,10; cp. ācaya° Dhs.584. 1013. Acc. °gāminaṁ: khemaṁ Amata° M.I,508; brahmacariyaṁ: nibbān’ogadha° It.28, 29; dukkhûpasama° maggaṁ Sn.724= Dh.191; niraya° maggaṁ Sn.277, ThA.243. Or °gāmiṁ: Sn.233, 381. (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

°Khattuṁ: {'def': '[Sk. °kṛtvah, cp. °kad] in compⁿ with numerals “times”: dvikkhattuṁ, tikkhattuṁ, etc.; twice, three times, etc. (Page 232)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

°Pa: {'def': '(adj.) [Cp. Ved. °pa, adj. base of pā to drink, as °ga fr. gam or °ṭha fr. sthā] drinking; only in foll. cpds.: dhenu° drinking of the cow, suckling calf M.I,79; Sn.26 (=dhenuṁ pivanto SnA 39); -- pāda° a tree (lit. drinking with its feet, cp. explⁿ at PvA.251 “pādasadisehi mūl’âvayavehi udakassa pivanato pādapo ti”) Pv IV.3⁹; -- majja° drinking intoxicants Sn.400; Pv IV.1⁷⁷ (a°). (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

°Ṭha: {'def': '(°ṭṭha) (adj.-suffix) [from tiṭṭhati] standing, as opposed to either lying down or moving; located, being based on, founded on (e. g. appa° based on little D.I,143): see kappa° (lasting a k.), kūṭa° (immovable), gaha° (founding a house, householder), dhamma°, nava°, vehāsa° (=vihan-ga). -- (n.) a stand i. e. a place for: goṭṭha a stable. (Page 289)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ñ: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十个辅音字母。发音是带音的 ny，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考西班牙语或马来语的发音。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñatta: {'def': '(nt.) [nomen agentis from jānāti] the intellectual faculty, intelligence Dh.72 (=DhA.II,73: jānanasabhāva). (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】学习，所知道的。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñatti: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. jñapti, from jñāpayati, caus of jñā] announcement, declaration, esp. as t. t. a motion or resolution put at a kammavācā (proceedings at a meeting of the chapter. The usual formula is “esā ñatti; suṇātu me bhante saṅgho”: Vin.I,340; III,150, 173, 228; -- °ṁ ṭhapeti to propose a resolution Vin.IV,152. -- Vin.V,142, 217 (na c’âpi ñatti na ca pana kammavācā). This resolution is also called a ñattikamma: Vin.II,89; IV,152; V,116; A.I,99. Two kinds are distinguished, viz. that at which the voting follows directly upon the motion, i. e. a ñatti-dutiya-kamma, & that at which the motion is put 3 times, & is then followed (as 4th item) by the decision, i. e. a ñ-catuttha-kamma. Both kinds are discussed at Vin.I,56, 317 sq.; II,89; III,156; IV,152; & passim. Cp. Divy 356: jñapticaturtha. Cp. āṇatti, viññatti. (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】公告，宣布，宣言，声明，建议。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñatvā: {'def': 'etc.: see jānāti. (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(【独】从 jānāti), 知道了，懂了，学会了。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñeyya: {'def': '【形】应该明白的。 ~dhamma, 【阳】应该明白或了解的法（事物）。(p139)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñāpana: {'def': '【中】公告，通知。(p139)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of jānāti, cp. also ñatti] to make known, to explain, to announce J.II,133. Cp. jānāpeti & āṇāpeti. (Page 288)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ñā + āpe), 令知，通告。【过】 ñāpesi。【过分】 ñāpita,【现分】 ñāpenta,【独】 ñāpetvā。(p139)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñāta: {'def': '[pp. of jānāti=Gr. gnwtόs, Lat. (g)notus; ajñāta (P. aññāta) = a)/gnwtos=ignotus] known, well-known; experienced, brought to knowledge, realized. In Nd² s. v. constantly expl. by tulita tirita vibhūta vibhāvita which series is also used as explⁿ. of diṭṭha & vidita A.V,195; J.I,266; Sn.343 (+yasassin); Miln.21 (id.). -- aññāta not known, unknown Vin.I,209; M.I,430; S.II,281; DhA.I,208. (Page 288)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jānāti 的【过分】) 已被知道，已众所周知，已认识到。(p139)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñātaka: {'def': '【阳】亲戚，亲属，同一民族（或种族、家族）。(p139)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[for *ñātika from ñāti] a relation, relative, kinsman Vin.II,194; M.II,67; Dh.43; Sn.263 (=KhA 140: ñāyante amhākaṁ ime ti ñātakā), 296, 579; Pv.II,1⁴ (Minayeff, but Hardy °ika); PvA.19, 21, 31, 62, 69; DA.I,90. (Page 288)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ñāti: {'def': '[see janati; cp. Sk. jñāti, Gr. gnwtόs, Lat. cognatus, Goth. knops] a relation, relative (=mātito pitito ca sambandhā PvA.25;=bandhū PvA.86; specialized as °sālohitā, see below). Pl. ñātayo (Pv.I,4³; KhA 209, 214) and ñātī (M.II,73; KhA 210, cp. 213; Acc. also ñātī Pv.I,6⁷); Sn.141; Dh.139, 204, 288; J.II,353; Pv.I,5³, 12²; II,3¹³, 6⁷. -- Discussed in detail with regard to its being one of the 10 paḷibodhā at Vism.94.

--kathā (boastful) talk about relatives D.I,7≈ (cp. DA.I,90); --gata coming into (the ties of) relationship J.VI,307 (°gataka ib. 308); --ghara the paternal home J.I,52; --dhamma the duties of relatives Pv.I,5¹²; (=ñātīhi ñātīnaṁ kattabba-karaṇaṁ PvA.30); --parivatta the circle of relations D.I,61; M.I,267; Pug.57≈; --peta a deceased relation Pv.I,5⁴; --majjhagata (adj.) in the midst of one’s relations Pug.29; --mittā (pl.) friends & relatives Dh.219; J.III,396; Pv.I,12⁶; --vyasana misfortune of relatives (opp. °sampada) D.III,235; enum as one of the general misfortunes under dukkha (see Nd² 304F); --saṅgha the congregation of kinsmen, the clan A.I,152; Sn.589; --sālohitạ a relation by blood (contrasted with friendship: mittāmaccā Sn.p. 104), often with ref. to the deceased: petā ñ-sālohitā the spirits of deceased blood-relations M.I,33; A.V,132, 269; PvA.27, 28; --sineha the affection of relationship PvA.29; --hetusampatti a blessing received through the kinsmen PvA.27. (Page 288)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】亲戚，同一民族（或种族、家族）。 ~kathā,【阴】亲戚论。 ~dhamma,【阳】亲戚的责任。 ~parivaṭṭa, 【中】亲戚的圈子。 ~peta, 【阳】已故的亲戚。 ~vyasana, 【中】亲戚的不幸。 ~saṅgaha, 【阳】善待亲戚。~saṅgha, 【阳】宗亲会。 ~sālohita, 【阳】血亲。(p139)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñāya: {'def': '[Sk. nyāya=ni+i] 1. method, truth, system, later =logic: °gantha book on logic Dāvs III,41. -- 2. fitness, right manner, propriety, right conduct, often appl^d to the “right path” (ariyamagga=ariyañāya Vin.I,10) D.III,120; S.V,19, 141, 167 sq., 185; A.II,95; IV,426; V,194; Dh.I,249; ariya ñ. S.II,68; V,387;= the causal law S.V,388;=kalyāṇa-kusala-dhammatā A.II,36; used in apposition with dhamma and kusala D.II,151; M.II,181, 197; is replaced herein by sacca S.I,240;=Nibbāna at Vism.219, 524; ñ.-paṭipanna walking in the right path S.V,343; A.II,56; III,212, 286; V,183. (Page 288)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】方法，系统，正确的方式。 ~paṭipanna, 【形】正确行道（走在正确的路径的）。(p139)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ñāṇa: {'def': '【中】智，智能，洞察力。 ~karaṇa, 【形】造智的（使人领悟的）。~cakkhu, 【中】智眼（智能的眼睛）。 ~jāla, 【中】智网（知识的网）。~dassana, 【中】智见（完美的知识）。 ~vippayutta, 【形】智不相应的（不与知识关联的）。 ~sampayutta, 【形】智相应的（与知识关联的）。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '「智」 (在此，用「直观的洞察」较适合。)', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(nt.) [from jānāti. See also jānana. *genē, as in Gr. gnώ--sis (cp. gnostic), gnw/mh; Lat. (co)gnitio; Goth. kunpi; Ogh. kunst; E. knowledge] knowledge, intelligence, insight, conviction, recognition, opp. añāṇa & avijjā, lack of k. or ignorance. -- 1. Ñāṇa in the theory of cognition: it occurs in intensive couple-compounds with terms of sight as cakkhu (eye) & dassana (sight, view), e. g. in cakkhu-karaṇa ñāṇa-karaṇa “opening our eyes & thus producing knowledge” i. e. giving us the eye of knowledge (a mental eye) (see cakkhu, jānāti passati, & cpd. °karaṇa): Bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti passaṁ passati cakkhu-bhūto ñāṇa-bhūto (=he is one perfected in knowledge) M.I,111=Nd² 235^3h; natthi hetu natthi paccayo ñāṇāya dassanāya ahetu apaccayo ñāṇaṁ dassanaṁ hoti “through seeing & knowing,” i. e. on grounds of definite knowledge arises the sure conviction that where there is no cause there is no consequence S.V,126. Cp. also the relation of diṭṭhi to ñāṇa. This implies that all things visible are knowable as well as that all our knowledge is based on empirical grounds; yāvatakaṁ ñeyyaṁ tāvatakaṁ ñāṇaṁ Nd² 235^3m; yaṁ ñāṇaṁ taṁ dassanaṁ, yaṁ dassanaṁ taṁ ñāṇaṁ Vin.III,91; ñāṇa+dassana (i. e. full vision) as one of the characteristics of Arahantship: see arahant II.D. Cp. BSk. jñānadarśana, e. g. AvŚ I.210. -- 2. Scope and character of ñāṇa: ñ. as faculty of understanding is included in paññā (cp. wisdom=perfected knowledge). The latter signifies the spiritual wisdom which embraces the fundamental truths of morality & conviction (such as aniccaṁ anattā dukkhaṁ: Miln.42); whereas ñ. is relative to common experience (see Nd² 235³ under cakkhumā, & on rel. of p. & ñ. Ps.I,59 sq.; 118 sq.; II,189 sq.). -- Perception (saññā) is necessary to the forming of ñāṇa, it precedes it (D.I,185); as sure knowledge ñ. is preferable to saddhā (S.IV,298); at Vin.III,91 the definition of ñ. is given with tisso vijjā (3 kinds of knowledge); they are specified at Nd² 266 as aṭṭhasamāpatti-ñāṇa (consisting in the 8 attainments, viz. jhāna & its 4 succeeding developments), pañc’abhiññā° (the 5 higher knowledges, see paññā & abhi°), micchā° (false k. or heresy). Three degrees of k. are distinguished at DA.I,100, viz. sāvaka-pāramī-ñāṇa, paccekabuddha°, sabbaññuta° (highest k. of a relig. student, k. of a wise man, & omniscience). Four objects of k. (as objects of truth or sammādiṭṭhi) are enum^d as dhamme ñāṇaṁ, anvaye ñ., paricchede ñ., sammuti ñ. at D.III,226, 277; other four as dukkhe ñ. (dukkha-) samudaye ñ., nirodhe ñ., magge ñ. (i. e. the knowledge of the paṭicca-samuppāda) at D.III,227; Ps.I,118; Vbh.235 (=sammādiṭṭhi). Right knowledge (or truth) is contrasted with false k. (micchā-ñāṇa=micchādiṭṭhi): S.V,384; M.II,29; A.II,222; V,327; Vbh.392. ‹-› 3. Ñāṇa in application: (a) Vin.I,35; D.II,155 (opp. pasāda); S.I,129 (cittamhi susamāhite ñāṇamhi vuttamānamhi); II,60 (jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan ti ñ.; see ñ-vatthu); A.I,219 (on precedence of either samādhi or ñ.); Sn.378, 789, 987 (muddhani ñāṇaṁ tassa na vijjati), 1078 (diṭṭhi, suti, ñ.: doctrine, revelation, personal knowledge, i. e. intelligence; differently expl. at Nd² 266), 1113; Pv III,5¹ (Sugatassa ñ. is asādhāraṇaṁ) Ps.I,194 sq.; II,244; Vbh.306 sq. (ñ-vibhaṅga), 328 sq. (kammassakataṁ ñ.); Nett 15 sq.; 161 (+ñeyya), 191 (id.). -- (b) ñāṇaṁ hoti or uppajjati knowledge comes to (him) i. e. to reason, to arrive at a conclusion (with iti=that . . .) S.II,124=III,28 (uppajjati); D.III,278 (id.); A.II,211≈; IV,75; V,195; S.III,154. See also arahant II.D. -- (c) Var. attributes of ñ.: anuttariya A.V,37; aparapaccayā (k. of the non-effect of causation through lack of cause) S.II,17, 78; III,135; V,179, 422 sq. (=sammādiṭṭhi), same as ahetu-ñāṇa S.V,126; asādhāraṇa (incomparable, uncommon k.) A.III,441; PvA.197; akuppa D.III,273; ariya A.III,451; pariyodāta S.I,198; bhiyyosomatta S.III,112; yathā bhūtaṁ (proper, definite, right k.) (concerning kāya, etc.) S.V,144; A.III,420; V,37. -- (d) knowledge of, about or concerning, consisting in or belonging to, is expressed either by Loc. or --° (equal to subj. or obj. Gen.). -- (a) with Loc.: anuppāde ñ. D.III,214, 274; anvaye D.III,226, 277; kāye D.III,274; khaye D.III,214, 220 (āsavānaṁ; cp. M.I,23, 183, 348; II,38), 275; S.II,30; Nett 15; cutûpapāte D.III,111, 220; dukkhe (etc.) D IIII,227; S.II,4; V,8, 430; dhamme D.III,226; S.II,58; nibbāne S.II,124 (cp. IV.86). -- (b) as --°: anāvaraṇa° DA.I,100; ariya S.I,228; A.III,451; khanti Ps.I,106; jātissara J.I,167; cutûpapāta M.I,22, 183, 347; II,38, etc.; ceto-pariya D.III,100, & °pariyāya S.V,160; dibbacakkhu Ps.I,114; dhammaṭṭhiti S.II,60, 124; Ps.I,50; nibbidā Ps.I,195; pubbe-nivāsânusati M.I,22, 248, 347; II,38, etc.; Buddha° Nd² 235³; Ps.I,133; II,31, 195; DA.I,100; sabbaññuta Ps.I,131 sq.; DA.I,99 sq.; PvA.197; sekha S.II,43, 58, 80, & asekha S.III,83. -- (e) aññāṇa wrong k., false view, ignorance, untruth S.I,181; II,92; III,258 sq.; V,126; A.II,11; Sn.347, 839; Ps.I,80; Pug.21; Dhs.390, 1061; see avijjā & micchādiṭṭhi.

--indriya the faculty of cognition or understanding Dhs.157; --ûpapanna endowed with k. Sn.1077 (=Nd² 266^b °upeta); --karaṇa (adj.) giving (right) understanding, enlightening, in combⁿ w. cakkhukaraṇa (giving (in)--sight, cp. “your eyes shall be opened and ye shall be knowing good and evil” Gen. 3⁵): kusalavitakkā anandha-karaṇā cakkhu° ñāṇa° It.82; f. --ī (of majjhimā-paṭipadā) S.IV,331; --cakkhu the eye of k. PvA.166; --jāla the net of k., in phrase ñāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭha coming within the net, i. e. into the range of one’s intelligence or mental eye (clear sight) DhA.I,26; II,37, 58, 96; III,171, 193; IV,61; VvA.63; --dassana “knowing and seeing,” “clear sight,” i. e. perfect knowledge; having a vision of truth, i. e. recognition of truth, philosophy, (right) theory of life, all-comprising knowledge. Defined as tisso vijjā (see above 2) at Vin.IV,26; fully discussed at DA.I,220, cp. also def. at Ps.II,244. -- Vin.II,178. (parisuddha°;+ājīva, dhammadesanā, veyyākaraṇa); III,90 sq.; V,164, 197; D.I,76≈(following after the jhānas as the first step of paññā, see paññā-sampadā); III,134, 222 (°paṭilābha), 288 (°visuddhi); M.I,195 sq.; 202 sq., 482; II,9, 31; Nett 17, 18, 28; see also vimutti°; --dassin one who possesses perfect k. Sn.478; --patha the path of k. Sn.868; --phusanā experience, gaining of k. DhA.I,230; --bandhu an associate or friend of k. Sn.911; --bhūta in comb” w. cakkhubhūta, having become seeing & knowing, i. e. being wise S.II,255; IV,94; A.V,226 sq.; --vatthūni (pl.) the objects or items of (right) knowledge which means k. of the paṭiccasamuppāda or causal connection of phenomena. As 44 (i. e. 4 X 11, all constituents except avijjā, in analogy to the 4 parts of the ariyasaccāni) S.II,56 sq., as 77 (7 X 11) S.II,59 sq.; discussed in extenso at Vbh.306--344 (called ñāṇavatthu); --vāda talk about (the attainment of supreme) knowledge D.III,13 sq.; A.V,42 sq.; --vippayutta disconnected with k. Dhs.147, 157, 270; --vimokkha emancipation through k. Ps.II,36, 42; --visesa distinction of k., superior k. PvA.196; --sampayutta associated with k. Dhs.1, 147, 157, etc.; Vbh.169 sq., 184, 285 sq., 414 sq. (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ñāṇika: {'def': '(adj.) in pañca° having five truths (of samādhi) D.III,278. (Page 288)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ñāṇin: {'def': '(adj.) knowing, one who is possessed of (right) knowledge S.II,169; A.II,89 (sammā°); IV,340. -- aññāṇin not knowing, unaware VvA.76. (Page 288)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ñāṇī: {'def': '【形】具智的（拥有知识的），明智的人。(p139)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

ñ: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十个辅音字母。发音是带音的 ny，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考西班牙语或马来语的发音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

ñapetvā: {'def': '[abs. of ñāpeti] having made known; having announced.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñapita: {'def': '[pp. of jānāpeti] made known; informed.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñapitvā: {'def': '[pp. of ñāpeti] made known; announced.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñar: {'def': '(jīr)﹐【字根I.】变老了(to get old)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

ñassati: {'def': '［jānātiのfut.］彼は知るであろう', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

ñatta: {'def': '(nt.), learning; something known.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'n. [Sk. jñatva 或 jñapta] 知能(智能), 知識. -ajjhāpanna 已變得有名的, 已得知識的.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'n. [Sk. jñatva または jñapta] 知能, 知識. -ajjhāpanna 有名となれる, 知識を得たる.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【中】学习，所知道的(the intellectual faculty, intelligence)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

ñatti: {'def': 'f. [Sk. jñapti. cf. jñāpayati] 告白, 表白, 白. -kamma 白羯磨. -catuttha 白四. -dutiya 白ニ.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. [Sk. jñapti. cf. jñāpayati] 告白, 表白, 白. -kamma 白羯磨. -catuttha 白四. -dutiya 白二.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(Sk. jñapti, from jñāpayati, caus. of jñā),【阴】公告，宣布，宣言，声明，建议(announcement, declaration)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[f.] announcement; declaration.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'f. [Sk. jñapti. cf. jñāpayati] 告白, 表白, 白. -kamma 白羯磨. -catuttha 白四. -catuttha-kamma白四羯磨（表白を第四とするカンマ，コンマ，仪式）. -dutiya 白ニ. -dutiya-kamma白二羯磨', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

ñatuṃ: {'def': '[inf. of jānāti] to know; to found out.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñatvā: {'def': '[abs. of jānāti] having known; having found out.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'jānāti 的 ger.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(‹jānāti), 【独】知道了，懂了，学会了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'jānāti の ger.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

ñeyya: {'def': '(adj.), what should be understood.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': '【形】应该明白的。ñeyyadhamma,【阳】应该明白或了解的法(事物)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. jñeya. jānāti の grd. ] 所知, 知らるべきもの. cf. ñātabba.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[Sk. jñeya. jānāti 的 grd. ] 所知, 能(可,應)被知者. cf. ñātabba.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

ñeyyadhamma: {'def': '[m.] anything that should be learnt or understood.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñi: {'def': '﹐【字根V.】征服(to conquer)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

ñā: {'def': '(jā)(梵jñā)﹐【字根V.】知(to know)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

ñāmi: {'def': 'jānātiのpr. sg.= jānāmi', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

ñāp: {'def': '﹐【字根VII.】使知道(to cause to know)，使高兴(to please)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

ñāpana: {'def': '【中】公告，通知。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[nt.] announcement; information.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāpenta: {'def': '[pr.p. of ñāpeti] making known; announcing.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāpesi: {'def': '[aor. of ñāpeti] made known; announced.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāpeti: {'def': '[jānāti の caus. ] 知らしむ, 表白す, 告知す. cf. jānāpeti, ñatti.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[jānāti 的 caus. ] 使知道, 表白, 告知. cf. jānāpeti, ñatti.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(ñā知道+āpe), 令知，通告(to make known, to explain, to announce)。【过】āpesi。【过分】āpita。【现分】ñāpenta。【独】ñāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ñā + āpe] makes known; announces.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāta: {'def': 'a. [Sk. jñāta. jānāti の pp.] 知られた, 有名な, 理解する. -aṭṭhe ñāṇaṁ所知の义の智. -pariññā 知遍知. -vibhūta 知無有', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': 'a. [Sk. jñāta. jānāti の pp.] 知られた, 有名な, 理解する -pariññā 知遍知. -vibhūta 知無有.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(jānāti 的【过分】) 已被知道，已衆所周知，已认识到(known, well-known; experienced, brought to knowledge, realized)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'a. [Sk. jñāta. jānāti 的 pp.] 被知的, 有名的, 理解的. -pariññā 知遍知. -vibhūta 知無有.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(pp. of jānāti), known; well-known; realised.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāta-pariññā: {'def': "'full understanding (or comprehension) of the known', is one of the 3 kinds of full understanding (pariññā q.v.).", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

ñātabba: {'def': 'ñātayya, ñāteyya, jānāti の grd.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'ñātayya, ñāteyya jānāti 的 grd.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

ñātaka: {'def': '(a. ) [cf. ñāti] 親族, 親戚, 親類.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '【阳】亲戚，亲属，同一民族(或种族、家族)( a relation, relative, kinsman)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[m.] a relation; kinsman.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': '(a.) [cf. ñāti] 親族, 親戚, 親類.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

ñātayya: {'def': 'ñātabba, ñāteyya, jānāti の grd.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '[pt.p. of] should be known.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāteyya: {'def': 'ñātabba, ñātayya, jānāti の grd.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

ñāti: {'def': 'f. [Sk. jñāti] 親族, 親類, 親里. pl. nom. acc. ñātayo, ñātī. -kathā 親族論, 親戚の話. -kula 親戚の家. -parihāni, pārijuñña 親族損亡. -byasana, -vyasana 親族の不幸, 損失. -rakkhitā 親族に護られた女. -vitakka 親里尋. -sampadā 親族成就. -sālohita 親族, 血縁.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. [Sk. jñāti] 親族, 親類, 親里(父母的家,出生的家). pl. nom. acc. ñātayo, ñātī. -kathā 親族論, 親戚的話. -kula 親戚的家. -parihāni, pārijuñña 親族損亡. -byasana, -vyasana 親族的不幸, 損失. -rakkhitā 被親族保護的女子. -vitakka 親里尋. -sampadā 親族成就. -sālohita 親族, 血緣.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '【阳】亲戚，同一民族(或种族、家族)( a relation, relative)。ñātikathā,【阴】亲戚论。ñātidhamma,【阳】亲戚的责任。ñātiparivaṭṭa,【中】亲戚的圈子。ñātipeta,【阳】已故的亲戚。ñātivyasana,【中】亲戚的不幸。ñātisaṅgaha,【阳】善待亲戚。ñātisaṅgha,【阳】宗亲会。ñātisālohita,【阳】血亲。Vbh.356.︰885. Tattha katamo ñātivitakko? ñātake ārabbha gehasito takko vitakko micchāsaṅkappo-- ayaṁ vuccati “ñātivitakko”.(什么叫做‘亲戚寻’？於亲戚进行与居家生活有关联的1寻、2寻思、3邪思惟，这称为‘亲戚寻’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m.), a kinsman.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': 'f. [Sk. jñāti] 親族, 親類, 親里. pl. nom. acc. ñātayo, ñātī. -kathā 親族論, 親戚の話. -kula 親戚の家. -parihāni, pārijuñña 親族損亡. -byasana, -vyasana 親族の不幸, 損失. -rakkhitā 親族に護られた女. -vitakka 親里尋. -vuddhi亲属の得，亲族の繁荣. -sampadā 親族成就. -sālohita 親族, 血縁', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

ñātidhamma: {'def': '[m.] the duties of relatives.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñātika: {'def': 'a.m.亲戚，亲族.= ñātaka', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

ñātikathā: {'def': '[f.] talk about relatives.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñātiparivaṭṭa: {'def': '[nt.] the circle of relations.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñātipeta: {'def': '[m.] a deceased relation.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñātisaṅgaha: {'def': '[m.] good treatment towards kinsmen.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñātisaṅgha: {'def': '[m.] congregation of kinsmen.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñātisālohita: {'def': '[m.] relations and blood-relations.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñātivyasana: {'def': '[nt.] misfortune of relatives.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñātu: {'def': '[m.] knower.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñātuṃ: {'def': 'jānāti の inf.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

ñāya: {'def': '【阳】方法，系统，正确的方式(method, truth, system)。ñāyapaṭipanna,【形】正确行道(走在正确的路径的)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '真理、方法、正确的行为', 'xr': '《巴利语字汇》 -葛印卡内观中心四念住课程开示集要附录'}; {'def': 'm. [Sk. nyāya] 理趣, 正理, 真理. -paṭipanna 正路に趣ける.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. [Sk. nyāya] 理趣, 正理, 真理. -paṭipanna 趣向正路的.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': "'right method', is often used as a name for the Noble Eightfold Path (s. magga), e.g. in the Satipaṭṭhāna Sutta (M. 10, D. 22).", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '[m.] method; system; right manner.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāyapaṭipanna: {'def': '[adj.] walking in the right path.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāyare: {'def': '[v.] they are known.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāyati: {'def': '[Sk. jñāyate. jānāti の pass.] 知られる.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[Sk. jñāyate. jānāti 的 pass.] 被知(道).', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

ñāṇa: {'def': '(nt.), wisdom; insight.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}; {'def': '(梵jñāṇa),【中】智，智慧，洞察力(knowledge, intelligence, insight, conviction, recognition)。ñāṇakaraṇa,【形】造智的(使人领悟的)。ñāṇacakkhu,【中】智眼(智慧的眼睛)。ñāṇajāla,【中】智网(知识的网)。ñāṇadassana,【中】智见(完美的知识)。ñāṇavippayutta,【形】智不相应的(不与知识关联的)。ñāṇasampayutta,【形】智相应的(与知识关联的)。dvi ñāṇa(梵dvi jñāna)﹐二智：尽有有智(梵yathajñāna；英knowledge of all convental phenomena)、如所有智(yāvatajñāna；英knowledge of all ultimate phenomena)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'n. [Sk. jñāna, jñā-ana] 智, 智慧. -āsi 智劍. -kathā 智論. -karaṇi 智生(起). -khagga 智劍. -cakkhu 智眼. -carita 智行者. -cariyā 智行. -dassana 智見. -patha 智路. -bandhu 根據智的(愛見的)親族親戚(an associate or relative of knowledge). -bhūta 已變智的, 有智慧的. -vatthu 智所依. -vāda 智論. -vippayutta 智不相應. -vivaṭṭa 智退轉. -smpayutta 智相應.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'Of the 9 kinds of insight-knowledge constituting the paṭipadā-ñāṇadassana-visuddhi (s. Vis.M. XXI), the following 6 are, as such, enumerated and explained for the first time in Pts.M., namely: udayabbayānupassanā-ñāṇa (I. 54-57), bhaṅgānupassanā-ñāṇa , (ib. 57f.). bhayatupatthāna-ñāṇa (ib. 59f). muccitukamyatā-ñāṇa , paṭisankhā-ñāṇa , saṅkhārupekkhā-ñāṇa (ib. 60-65). The terms udayabbaya and bhaṅga , in connection with the 5 groups of existence, however, are often met with in the old sutta texts. Of the remaining 3 kinds of knowledge, ādīnavānupassanā , nibbidānupassanā and anulomañāṇa , the first 2 occur often in the old sutta texts, while anuloma-ñāṇa , though only briefly mentioned in the Abh. Canon (Patth.), plays a prominent part in the exegetical literature.', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '真智', 'xr': '《巴利语字汇》 -葛印卡内观中心四念住课程开示集要附录'}; {'def': "'knowledge, comprehension, intelligence, insight', is a synonym for paññā (q.v.); see also vipassanā.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': 'n. [Sk. jñāna, jñā-ana] 智, 智慧. ñāṇa-vipphārā iddhi智遍满神变. ñāṇa-vivaṭṭe ñānaṁ智退转の智. -āsi 智劍. -kathā 智論. -karaṇi 智を生じ. -khagga 智劍. -cakkhu 智眼. -carita 智行者. -cariyā 智行. -dassana 智見. -patha 智路. -bandhu 智による(愛見の)親戚. -bhūta 智となれる, 智慧ある. -ratana智宝. -vajira智慧の金刚. -vatthu 智所依. -vāda 智論. -vippayutta 智不相応. -vippayutta-vipāka智不相应异熟. -vibhaṅga智分别. -vimokkha智慧解脱. -vivaṭṭa 智退転. -saṁvara智律仪. -smpayutta 智相応. -sampayutta-kiriyā智相应唯作. -sampayutta-mahā-vipāka智相应大异熟', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': 'n. [Sk. jñāna, jñā-ana] 智, 智慧. -āsi 智劍. -kathā 智論. -karaṇi 智を生じ. -khagga 智劍. -cakkhu 智眼. -carita 智行者. -cariyā 智行. -dassana 智見. -patha 智路. -bandhu 智による(愛見の)親戚. -bhūta 智となれる, 智慧ある. -vatthu 智所依. -vāda 智論. -vippayutta 智不相応. -vivaṭṭa 智退転. -smpayutta 智相応.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

ñāṇa-vipphārā iddhi: {'def': "the 'power of penetrating knowledge', is one of the magical powers (iddhi, q.v.).", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

ñāṇacakkhu: {'def': '[nt.] the eye of knowledge.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāṇadassana: {'def': '【中】智见，有十六观智：一、名色分别智(nāmarūpaparicchdañāṇa)名色摄受智，或称为「名色差别智」(nāmarūpavavaṭṭhānañāṇa)。二、缘摄受智(paccayapariggahañāṇa)三、思惟智(sammasanañāṇaṁ)。四、生灭智(udayabbayañāṇaṁ﹐udaya生+vaya灭+ñāṇa智)。五、坏灭智(bhaṅgañāṇaṁ)。六、怖畏智(bhayañāṇaṁ)。七、过患智(ādīnavañāṇaṁ)。八、厌离智(nibbidāñāṇaṁ)。九、欲解脱智(muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṁ)。十、审察智(paṭisaṅkhāñāṇaṁ)。十一、行舍智(saṅkhar’upekkhañāṇaṁ)。十二、随顺智(anulamañāṇaṁ)。十三、种姓智(gotrabhūñāṇa)。十四、道智(maggañāṇa)。十五、果智(phalañāṇa)。十六、省察智(paccavekkhaṇañāṇa审察智)。(详见Vism.ch.18~22,pp. 587-697)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[nt.] perfect knowledge.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāṇadassana-visuddhi: {'def': "'purification of knowledge and vision', is the last of the 7 purifications and a name for path-knowledge (maggañāṇa), i.e. the penetrating realization of the path of Stream-winning, Once-returning, Non-returning or Arahatship. Vis.M. XXII furnishes a detailed explanation of it (s. visuddhi, VII).

In A. IV, 41 ñāṇadassana apparently means the divine eye (dibbacakkhu, s. abhiññā), being produced through concentrating the mind on light.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

ñāṇajāla: {'def': '[nt.] the net of knowledge.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāṇakaraṇa: {'def': '[adj.] enlightening.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāṇamattāya: {'def': 'for the purpose of knowledge.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāṇasampayutta: {'def': '[adj.] associated with knowledge.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāṇavippayutta: {'def': '[adj.] void of knowledge.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

ñāṇika: {'def': 'a. 智的.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'a. 智の.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

ñāṇin: {'def': '【形】具智的(拥有知识的)，明智的人(knowing, one who is possessed of (right) knowledg)。añāṇin,【形】无智的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'a. 有智的.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'a. 智ある.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

ñāṇī: {'def': '(adj.), possessed of knowledge; a wise person.', 'xr': '《Concise Pali-English Dictionary》 by A.P. Buddhadatta Mahathera'}

Ā: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二个元音字母。发音好像汉语中阴平的 a。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】一直到，等于。【介】从，向。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (indecl.) [Vedic ā, prep. with Acc., Loc., Abl., meaning “to, towards”, & also “from”. Orig. an emphatic-deictic part. (Idg. *ē) = Gr. h]_ surely, really; Ohg. --ā etc., increment of a (Idg. *e), as in Sk. a-sau; Gr. e\\keί (cp. a³), see Brugmann, Kurze Vergl. Gr. 464, 465] a frequent prefix, used as well-defined simple base-prefix (with rootderivations), but not as modification (i. e. first part of a double prefix cpd. like sam-ā-dhi) except in one case ā-ni-saṁsa (which is doubtful & of diff. origin, viz. from comb^n. āsaṁsa-nisaṁsa, see below 3^b). It denotes either touch (contact) or a personal (close) relation to the object (ā ti anussaraṇ’atthe nipāto PvA.165), or the aim of the action expressed in the verb. -- (1.) As prep. c. Abl. only in J in meaning “up to, until, about, near” J.VI,192 (ā sahassehi = yāva s. C.), prob. a late development. As pref. in meaning “forth, out, to, towards, at, on” in foll. applications: -- (a) aim in general or touch in particular (lit.), e. g. ākaḍḍhati pull to, along or up; °kāsa shining forth; °koṭeti knock at; °gacchati go towards; °camati rinse over; °neti bring towards, ad-duce; °bhā shining forth; °bhujati bend in; °masati touch at; °yata stretched out; °rabhati at-tempt; °rohana a-scending; °laya hanging on; °loketi look at; °vattati ad-vert; °vahati bring to; °vāsa dwelling at; °sādeti touch; °sīdati sit by; °hanati strike at. -- (b) in reflexive function: close relation to subject or person actively concerned, e. g. ādāti take on or up (to oneself); °dāsa looking at, mirror; °dhāra support; °nandati rejoice; °nisaṁsa subjective gain; °bādha being affected; °modita pleased; °rakkha guarding; °rādhita satisfied; °rāma (personal) delight in; °lingati embrace (to oneself); °hāra taking to (oneself). -- (c) in transitive function: close relation to the object passively concerned, e. g. āghātana killing; °carati indulge in; °cikkhati point ont, explain; °jīva living on; °ṇāpeti give an order to somebody; °disati point out to some one; °bhindati cut; °manteti ad-dress; °yācati pray to; °roceti speak to; siñcati besprinkle; °sevati indulge in. -- (d) out of meaning (a) develops that of an intensive-frequentative prefix in sense of “all-round, completely, very much”, e. g. ākiṇṇa strewn all over, °kula mixed up; °dhuta moved about; °rāva shouting out or very much; °luḷati move about; °hiṇḍati roam about. -- 2. Affinities. Closely related in meaning and often interchanging are the foll. prep. (prefixes): anu (°bhati), abhi (°saṁsati), pa (°tapati), paṭi (°kaṅkhati) in meaning 1 a-c; and vi (°kirati, °ghāta, °cameti, °lepa, °lopa), sam (°tapati, °dassati) in meaning 1 d. See also 3^b. -- 3. Combinations: (a) Intensifying comb^ns. of other modifying prefixes with ā as base: anu + ā (anvā-gacchati, °disati, °maddati, °rohati, °visati, °sanna, °hata), paṭi + ā (paccā-janati, °ttharati, °dāti, °savati), pari + ā (pariyā-ñāta, °dāti, °pajjati, °harati), sam + ā (samā-disati, °dāna, °dhi, °pajjati, °rabhati). -- (b) Contrast-comb^ns. with other pref. in a double cpd. of noun, adj. or verb (cp. above 2) in meaning of “up & down, in & out, to & fro”; ā + ni: āvedhika-nibbedhika, āsaṁsa-nisaṁsa (contracted to ānisaṁsa), āsevita-nisevita; ā + pa: assasatipassasati (where both terms are semantically alike; in exegesis however they have been differentiated in a way which looks like a distortion of the original meaning, viz. assasati is taken as “breathing out”, passasati as “breathing in”: see Vism.271), assāsa-passāsa, āmoditapamodita, āhuna-pāhuna, āhuneyya-pāhuneyya; ā + paccā: ākoṭita-paccākoṭita; ā + pari: ākaḍḍhana-parikaḍḍhana, āsaṅkita-parisaṅkita; ā + vi: ālokita-vilokita, āvāha-vivāha, āveṭhana-viniveṭhana; a + sam: allāpa-sallāpa: ā + samā: āciṇṇa-samāciṇṇa. -- 4. Before double consonants ā is shortened to a and words containing ā in this form are to be found under a°, e. g. akkamaṇa, akkhitta, acchādeti, aññāta, appoṭeti, allāpa, assāda. (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābaddha: {'def': '[pp. of ābandhati] tied, bound, bound up DA.I,127; fig. bound to, attached to, in love with DhA.I,88; PvA.82 (Tissāya °sineha); Sdhp.372 (sineh, °hadaya). (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ābandhati 的【过分】)。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ābandhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [ā + bandh, cp. Sk. ābandha tie, bond] (being) tied to (Loc.) PvA.169 (sīse). (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】绑，连接，安装。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ābandhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ā + bandh] -- 1. tie, bond DA.I,181 = Pug.A 236 (°atthena ñāti yeva ñāti-parivaṭṭo). ‹-› 2. tying, binding Vism.351 (°lakkhaṇa, of āpodhātu). ‹-› 3. reins (?) or harness (on a chariot) J.V,319 (but cp. C. expl^n. “hatthi-assa-rathesu ābandhitabbāni bhaṇḍakāni”, thus taking it as ā + bhaṇḍa + na, i. e. wares, loads etc.). With this cp. Sk. ābandha, according to Halāyudha 2, 420 a thong of leather which fastens the oxen to the yoke of a plough. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābandhati: {'def': '(ā + bandh + a), 绑，纠缠。 ābandhi, 【过】。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ā + bandhati, Sk. ābadhnāti, bandh] to bind to, tie, fasten on to, hold fast; fig. to tie to, to attach to, J.IV,132, 289; V,319, 338, 359. -- pp. ābaddha. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābharati: {'def': '[ā + bhṛ] to bring, to carry; ger. ābhatvā J.IV,351. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābharaṇa: {'def': '【中】修饰，装饰。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. ābharaṇa, ā + bhṛ] that which is taken up or put on, viz. ornament, decoration, trinkets D.II,104; Vv 80²; J.III,11, 31; DhA.III,83; VvA.187. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhassara: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Ābhāsvara] 光音[天], 極光[天], [第二禪天的最上位].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [etym. uncertain; one suggested in Cpd. 138 n. 4 is ā + *bha + *sar, i. e. from whose bodies are emitted rays like lightning, more probably a comb^n. of ābhā + svar (to shine, be bright), i. e. shining in splendour] shining, brilliant, radiant, N. of a class of gods in the Brahma heavens “the radiant gods”, usually referred to as the representatives of supreme love (pīti & mettā); thus at D.I,17; Dh.200; It.15; DhA.III,258 (°loka). In another context at Vism.414 sq. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】发光的。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ābhata: {'def': '【过分】已带来，已传达。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of ā + bharati from bhṛ] brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken D.I,142; S. I.65; A.II,71, 83; It.12, 14 with phrase yathābhataṁ as he has been reared (cp. J.V,330 evaṁ kicchā bhaṭo); Pv III,5 (ratt° = rattiyaṁ ā. PvA.199); DhA.II,57, 81; IV,89; VvA.65. Cp. yathābhata. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhataka: {'def': '(adj.) = ābhata; DA.I,205 (v. l. ābhata). (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābheti: {'def': '[*ābhayati = ābhāti, q. v.] to shine Pv.II,12⁶ (ppr. °entī); Vv 8² (°antī, v. l. °entī; = obhāsentī VvA.50). (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhicetasika: {'def': '(adj.) See abhicetasika. This spelling, with guṇa of the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is the more frequent. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhidhammika: {'def': '【形】精通论藏的，进修论藏的。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [abhidhamma + ika] belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the Abhidhamma Miln.17, 341; Vism.93. As abhi° atKhA 151; J.IV,219. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhidosika: {'def': '【形】昨晚的。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [abhidosa+ika] belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin.III,15 (of food; stale); M.I,170 (°kālakata died last night); Miln.291. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhindati: {'def': '[ā + bhindati] to split, cut, strike (with an axe) S.IV,160 (v. l. a°). (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhisekika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. abhiseka] belonging to the consecration (of a king) Vin.V,129. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】供献的，献祭仪式的。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ābhoga: {'def': '[fr. ābhuñjati, bhuj² to enjoy etc. The translators of Kvu derive it from bhuj¹ to bend etc. (Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4) which however is hardly correct, cp. the similar meaning of gocara “pasturing”, fig. perception etc.] ideation, idea, thought D.I,37 (= manasikāro samannāhāro DA.I,122; cp. semantically āhāra = ābhoga, food); Vbh.320; Miln.97; Vism.164, 325, 354; Dāvs 62; KhA 42 (°paccavekkhana), 43 (id.) 68. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】构思能力，想法。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ābhujana: {'def': '【中】蹲下，弯曲，弄脏。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ābhujati] crouching, bending, turning in, in phrase pallaṅk’ābhujana sitting cross-legged J I 17 (V.91); PvA.219. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhujati: {'def': '[ā + bhujati, bhuj¹] to bend, bend towards or in, contract; usually in phrase pallaṅkaṁ ā° “to bend in the round lap” or “bend in hookwise”, to sit crosslegged (as a devotee with straightened back), e. g. at Vin.I,24; D.I,71; M.I,56 (v. l. ābhuñjitvā), 219; A.III,320; Pug.68; Ps.I,176; J.I,71, 213; Miln.289; DA.I,58, 210. In other connection J.I,18 (V.101; of the ocean “to recede”); Miln.253 (kāyaṁ). (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhujī: {'def': '(f.) [lit. the one that bends, prob. a poetic metaphor] N. of a tree, the Bhūrja or Bhojpatr J.V,195 (= bhūjapatta-vana C.), 405 (= bhūjapatta C.). (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhuñjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ābhuñjati] partaking of, enjoying, experiencing DhsA.333. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhā: {'def': '【阴】ābhāsa, 【阳】光，光彩，光辉。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. ābhā, fr. ā + bhā, see ābhāti] shine, splendour, lustre, light D.II,12; M.III,147 (adj. --°); S.II,150 (°dhātu); A.II,130, 139; III,34; Mhvs XI.11; VvA.234 (of a Vimāna, v. l. pabhā); DhA.IV,191; Sdhp.286. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhāsa: {'def': '[Sk. ābhāsa, fr. ā + bhās] splendour, light, appearance M.III,215. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhāti: {'def': '(ā + bhā + a), 发亮，发光。 ābhāsi, 【过】。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + bhā] to shine, shine forth, radiate Dh.387 (= virocati DhA.IV,144); J.V,204. See also ābheti. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhāveti: {'def': '[ā + bhāveti] to cultivate, pursue Pv.II,13¹⁹ (mettacittaṁ; gloss & v. l. abhāvetvā; expl^d. as vaḍḍhetvā brūhetvā PvA.168). (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābhūñjati: {'def': '[ā + bhuj², Sk. bhunakti] to enjoy, partake of, take in, feel, experience J.IV,456 (bhoge; Rh. D. “hold in its hood”?); DhsA.333. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābila: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. āvila; see also P. āvila] turbid, disturbed, soiled J.V,90. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ābujati: {'def': '(ā + bhuj + a), 弯曲，盘绕，缩短。 ābhuji, 【过】。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ābādha: {'def': '[ā + bādh to oppress, Vedic ābādha oppression] affliction, illness, disease Vin.IV,261; D.I,72; II,13; A.I,121; III,94, 143; IV,333, 415 sq., 440; Dh.138; Pug.28; Vism.41 (udara-vāta°) 95; VvA.351 (an° safe & sound); SnA 476; Sdhp.85. -- A list of ābādhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuṭṭhānā, semha°, vāta°, sannipātikā, utu-pariṇāmajā, visama-parihārajā, opakkamikā, kammavipākajā (after Nd² 304^I.C., recurring with slight variations at S.IV,230; A.II,87; III,131; V,110; Nd¹ 17, 47; Miln.112, cp. 135). ‹-› Another list of illnesses mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin.II,, p. 351. -- Five ābādhas at Vin.I, 71, viz. kuṭṭhaṁ gaṇḍo kilāso soso apamāro said to be raging in Magadha cp. p. 93. -- Three ābādhas at D.III,75, viz. icchā anasanaṁ jarā, cp. Sn.311. -- See also cpd. appābādha (health) under appa. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】疾病，痛苦。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ābādheti: {'def': '[ā + Caus. of bādh, cp. ābādha] to oppress, vex, annoy, harass S.IV,329. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + badh + e), 压迫，骚扰。 ~esi, 【过】。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ābādhika: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. ābādha] affected with illness, a sick person A.III,189, 238; Nd¹ 160; Miln.302; DA. 212; DhA.I,31; PvA.271. -- f. ābādhikinī a sick woman A.II,144. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】病人，染病。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ābādhita: {'def': '(ābādheti 的【过分】), 已痛苦，已压迫。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of ābādheti, Caus. of ā + bādh] afflicted, oppressed, molested Th.1, 185. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācamana: {'def': '(nt.) [ā + camana of cam] rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth D.I,12 (= udakena mukhasiddhi-karaṇa DA.I,98); (b) after evacuation J III 486.

--kumbhī water-pitcher used for rinsing Vin.I,49, 52; II,142, 210, 222. --pādukā slippers worn when rinsing Vin.I,190; II,142, 222. --sarāvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin.II,142, 221. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】冲洗。 ~kumbhī, 【阴】作为冲洗的大水罐。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācamati: {'def': '[ā + cam] to take in water, to resorb, to rinse J.III,297; Miln.152, 262 (+ dhamati). -- Caus. I. ācamcti (a) to purge, rinse one’s mouth Vin.II,142; M.II,112; A.III,337; Pv IV.1^Q3 (ācamayitvā = mukhaṁ vikkhāletvā PvA.241); Miln.152 (°ayamāna). -- (b) to wash off, clean oneself after evacuation Vin.II,221. -- Caus. II. ācamāpeti to cause somebody to rinse himself J.VI,8. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācameti: {'def': '(ā + cam + e), 冲洗，洗。 ācamesi, 【过】。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācamā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. ā + cam] absorption, resorption Nd¹ 429 (on Sn.945, which both in T. and in SnA reads ājava; expl^d. by taṇhā in Nidd.). Note. Index to SnA (Pj III) has ācāma. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācarati: {'def': '[ā + aarati] -- 1. to practice, perform, indulge in Vin.I,56; II,118; Sn.327 (ācare dhamma-sandosa-vādaṁ), 401; Miln.171, 257 (pāpaṁ). Cp. pp. ācarita in BSk. e. g. Av. S.I,124, 153, 213 in same meaning. -- pp. āciṇṇa. -- 2. to step upon, pass through J.V,153. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + car + a), 行动，练习，运行。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācarin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. ā + car] treaching, f. ācarinī a female teacher Vin.IV,227 (in contrast to gaṇa & in same sense as ācariya m. at Vin.IV,130), 317 (id.). (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācariya: {'def': '老师', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '[fr. ā + car] a teacher (almost syn. with upajjhāya) Vin.I,60, 61, 119 (°upajjhāya); II,231; IV,130 (gaṇo vā ācariyo a meeting of the bhikkhus or a single teacher, cp. f. ācarinī); D.I,103, 116 (gaṇ°) 238 (sattamâcariyamahāyuga seventh age of great teachers); III,189 sq.; M.III,115; S.I,68 (gaṇ°), 177; IV,176 (yogg°); A.I,132 (pubb°); Sn.595; Nd¹ 350 (upajjhāya vā āc°); J.II,100, 411; IV,91; V,501; Pv IV.3²³, 3⁵¹ (= ācāra-samācāra-sikkhāpaka PvA.252); Miln.201, 262 (master goldsmith?); Vism.99 sq.; KhA 12, 155; SnA 422; VvA.138. ‹-› For contracted form of ācariya see ācera.

--kula the clan of the teacher A.II,112. --dhana a teacher’s fee S.I,177; A.V,347. --pācariya teacher upon teacher, lit. “teacher & teacher’s teacher” (see ā¹ 3^b) D.I,94, 114, 115, 238; S.IV,306, 308; DA.I,286; SnA 452 (= ācariyo c’eva ācariya-ācariyo ca). --bhariyā the teacher’s fee J.V,457; VI,178; DhA.I,253. --muṭṭhi “the teacher’s fist” i. e. close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back, D.II,100; S.V,153; J.II,221, 250; Miln.144; SnA 180, 368. --vaṁsa the line of the teachers Miln.148. --vatta serving the teacher, service to the t. DhA.I,92. --vāda traditional teaching; later as heterodox teaching, sectarian teaching (opp. theravāda orthodox doctrine) Miln.148; Dpvs.V,30; Mhbv 96. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】老师。 ~kula, 【中】老师的家庭，老师的住所。 ~dhana, 【中】学费。 ~muṭṭhi, 【阴】老师的特别知识。 ~vāda, 【阳】传统的教学。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācariyaka: {'def': '[ācariya + ka, diff. from Sk. ācariyaka nt. art of teaching] a teacher Vin.I,249; III,25, 41; D.I,88, 119, 187; II,112; M.I,514; II,32; S.V,261; A.II,170; IV, 310. See also sācariyaka. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācariyānī: {'def': '【阴】女老师，老师的妻子。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācaya: {'def': '[ā + caya] heaping up, accumulation, collection, mass (opp. apacaya). See on term Dhs.trsl. 195 & Cpd. 251, 252. -- S.II,94 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A.IV,280 = Vin.II,259 (opp. apacaya); Dhs.642, 685; Vbh.319, 326, 330; Vism.449; DhA.II,25.

--gāmin making for piling up (of rebirth) A.V,243, 276; Dhs.584, 1013, 1397; Kvu 357. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】积聚。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācela: {'def': 'in kañcanācela-bhūsita “adorned with golden clothes” Pv.II,12⁷ stands for cela°. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācera: {'def': '【阳】老师。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'is the contracted form of ācariya; only found in the Jātakas, e. g. J.IV,248; VI,563. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācikkhaka: {'def': 'ācikkhitu, 【阳】报告的人，通知者。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [ā + cikkha + ka of cikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA.I,71. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācikkhana: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [ā + cikkhana of cikkhati] telling, announcing J.III,444; PvA.121. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācikkhati: {'def': '[Freq. of ā + khyā, i. e. akkhāti] to tell, relate, show, describe, explain D.I,110; A II 189 (atthaṁ ā to interpret); Pug.59; DhA.I,14; SnA 155; PvA.121, 164 (describe). -- imper. pres. ācikkha Sn.1097 (= brūhi Nd² 119 & 455); Pv.I,10⁹; II,8¹; and ācikkhāhi DhA.II,27. ‹-› aor. ācikkhi PvA.6, 58, 61, 83. -- ācikkhati often occurs in stock phrase ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati etc., e. g. Nd¹ 271; Nd² 465; Vism.163. -- attānaṁ ā. to disclose one’s identity PvA.89, 100. -- pp. ācikkhita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. ācikkhāpeti to cause some body to tell DhA.II,27. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + cikkh + a), 告知，陈述，通知。 ācikkhi, 【过】。 ācikkhita, 【过分】。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācikkhita: {'def': '[pp. of acikkhati] shown, described, told PvA.154 (°magga), 203 (an° = anakkhāta). (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācikkhitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. ācikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA.II,107 (for pavattar). (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācinanta: {'def': '【现分】累积。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācināti: {'def': '[ā + cināti] to heap up, accumulate S.III,89 (v. l. ācinati); IV,73 (ppr. ācinato dukkhaṁ); DhsA.44. -- pp. ācita & āciṇa (ācina). -- Pass. ācīyati (q. v.). (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + ci + nā), 堆积，累积。 ācini, 【过】。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācita: {'def': '[pp. of ācināti] accumulated, collected, covered, furnished or endowed with J.VI,250 (= nicita); Vv 41¹; DhsA.310. See also āciṇa. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āciṇa: {'def': '[pp. of ācināti? or is it distorted from āciṇṇa?] accumulated; practised, performed Dh.121 (pāpaṁ = pāpaṁ āciṇanto karonto DhA.III,16). It may also be spelt ācina. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āciṇṇa: {'def': '(ācināti 的【过分】), 已练习。 ~kappa, 【阳】习惯的练习。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + ciṇṇa, pp. of ācarati] practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in M.I,372 (kamma, cp. Miln.226 and the expl^n. of āciṇṇaka kamma as “chronic karma” at Cpd. 144); S.IV,419; A.V,74 sq.; J.I,81; DA.I,91 (for aviciṇṇa at D.I,8), 275; Vism.269; DhA.I,37 (°samāciṇṇa thoroughly fulfilled); VvA.108; PvA.54; Sdhp.90.

--kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary practice (?) Vin.I,79; II,301; Dpvs.IV,47; cp. V.18. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācāma: {'def': '【阳】饭沸腾时的浮渣。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. ācāma] the scum or foam of boiling rice D.I,166; M.I,78; A.I,295; J.II,289; Pug.55; VvA.99 sq.; DhA.III,325 (°kuṇḍaka). (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācāmeti: {'def': '[for ācameti? cp. Sk. ācāmayati, Caus. of ā + cam] at M.II,112 in imper. ācāmehi be pleased or be thanked(?); perhaps the reading is incorrect. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācāra: {'def': '[ā + car] way of behaving, conduct, practice, esp. right conduct, good manners; adj. (-°) practising, indulging in, or of such & such a conduct. -- Sn.280 (pāpa°); J.I,106 (vipassana°); II,280 (°ariya); VI,52 (ariya°); SnA 157; PvA.12 (sīla°), 36, 67, 252; Sdhp.441. --an° bad behaviour Vin.II,118 (°ṁ ācarati indulge in bad habits); DhA.II,201 (°kiriyā). Cp. sam°.

--kusala versed in good manners Dh.376 (cp. DhA.IV,111). --gocara pasturing in good conduct; i. e. practice of right behaviour D.I,63 = It.118; M.I,33; S.V,187; A.I,63 sq.; II,14, 39; III,113, 155, 262; IV,140, 172, 352; V,71 sq., 89, 133, 198; Vbh.244, 246 (cp. Miln.368, 370, quot. Vin.III,185); Vism.I,8. --vipatti failure of morality, a slip in good conduct Vin.I,171. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】行为，练习。 ~kusala, 【形】精通于礼貌的。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ācārin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. ācāra] of good conduct, one who behaves well A.I,211 (anācārī viratā l. 4 fr. bottom is better read as ācārī virato, in accordance with v. l.). (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ācīyati: {'def': '(& Āceyyati) [Pass. of ācināti, cp. cīyati] to be heaped up, to increase, to grow; ppr. āceyyamāna J.V,6 (= ācīyanto vaḍḍhanto C.). (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādahati: {'def': '¹ [ā + dahati¹] to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism.289 (samaṁ ā.=samādahati). Cp. sam° and ādhiyati. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [ā + dahati²] to set fire to, to burn J.VI,201, 203. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādapeti: {'def': '[Caus. of ādāti] to cause one to take, to accept, agree to M.II,104; S.I,132. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādara: {'def': '[Sk. ādara, prob. ā + dara, cp. semantically Ger. ehrfurcht awe] consideration of, esteem, regard, respect, reverence, honour J.V,493; SnA 290; DA.I,30; DhsA.61; VvA.36, 61, 101, 321; PvA.121, 123, 135, 278; Sdhp.2, 21, 207, 560. --anādara lack of reverence, disregard, disrespect; (adj.) disrespectful S.I,96; Vin.IV,218; Sn.247 (= ādara-virahita SnA 290; DA.I,284; VvA.219; PvA.3, 5, 54, 67, 257. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】尊敬，关心，感情。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādaratā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. ādara] = ādara, in neg. an° want of consideration J.IV,229; Dhs.1325 = Vbh.359 (in expl^n. of dovacassatā). (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādariya: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. ādara] showing respect of honour; neg. an° disregard, disrespect Vin.II,220; A.V,146, 148; Pug.20; Vbh.371; miln 266. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādava: {'def': '[ā + dava²?] is gloss at VvA.216 for maddava Vv 51²³; meaning: excitement, adj. exciting. The passage in VvA.is somewhat corrupt, & therefore unclear. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādesa: {'def': '【阳】 1. 指出。 2. 文法的替换。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. ādisati, cp. Sk. ādeśa] information, pointing out; as tt. g. characteristic, determination, substitute, e. g. kutonidānā is at SnA 303 said to equal kiṁ-nidānā, the to of kuto (Abl.) equalling or being substituted for the Acc. case: paccatta-vacanassa to-ādeso veditabbo. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādesanā: {'def': 'ādisanā, 【阴】预言，猜测，指出。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [ā + desanā] pointing out, guessing, prophesy; only in phrase °pāṭihāriya trick or marvellous ability of mind-reading or guessing other peoples character Vin.II,200; D.I,212, 213; III,220; A.I,170, 292; V,327; Ps.II, 227. For pāṭihāriya is subsiituted °vidhā (lit. variety of, i. e. act or performance etc.) at D.III,103. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādeti: {'def': '[a + deti, base² of dadāti (day° & de°), cp. also ādiyati] to take, receive, get Sn.121 (= gaṇhāti SnA 179), 954 (= upādiyati gaṇhāti Nd¹ 444); cp. I.4³; J.III, 103, 296; V,366 (= gaṇhāti C.; cp. ādiyati on p. 367); Miln.336. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādeva: {'def': '【阳】ādevanā, 【阴】悲叹，哭，深表悲痛。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Ādevanā [ā + div. devati] lamenting, deploring, crying etc. in ster. phrase (explaining parideva or pariddava) ādevo paridevo ādevanā pari° ādevitattaṁ pari° Nd¹ 370 = Nd² 416 = Ps.I,38. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādeyya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of ādāti (q. v.)] to be taken up, acceptable, pleasant, welcome, only in phrase °vacana welcome or acceptable speech, glad words Vin.II,158; J.VI,243; Miln.110; ThA.42. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可拿起来的，可接受的。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādheyya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of ā + dadhāti cp. ādhāna²] to be deposited (in one’s head & heart Pug.A), to be heeded, to be appropriated [in latter meaning easily mixed with ādheyya, cp. vv. ll. under ādiya²]; nt. depository (= ādhātabbatā ṭhapetabbatā Pug.A 217) Pug.34 (°ṁ gacchati is deposited); Miln.359 (sabbe tass’ādheyya² honti they all become deposited in him, i. e. his deposits or his property).

--mukha see ādiya². (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】属于，应该生的。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādhipacca: {'def': '(& Ādhipateyya) (nt.) [fr. adhi + pati + ya “being over-lord”; see also adhipateyya] supreme rule, lordship, sovereignty, power S.V,342 (issariy°); A.I,62 (id.), 147, 212; II,205 (id.); III,33, 76; IV,252 sg.; Pv.II,9⁵⁹ (one of the ṭhānas, cp. ṭhāna II.2b; see also D.III,146, where spelt ādhipateyya; expl^d. by issariya at PvA.137); J.I,57; Dāvs.V,17; VvA.126 (gehe ā = issariya). The three (att°, lok°, dhamm°) at Vism.14. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'ādhipateyya, 【中】贵族权力，权力。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādhunāti: {'def': '(ā + dhu + nā), 抖落，摆脱，除去。 ādhuni, 【过】。 ādhūta, 【过分】。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādhuta: {'def': '[ā + dhuta¹] shaken, moved (by the wind, i. e. fanned Vv 39⁴ (v. l. adhuta which is perhaps to be preferred, i. e. not shaken, cp. vātadhutaṁ Dāvs.V,49; VvA.178 expl^s. by saṇikaṁ vidhūpayamāna, i. e. gently fanned). (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādhāna: {'def': '【中】 1. 放置。 2. 容器。 3. 用树篱围。 ~gāhī, 【阳】倔强的人。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [ā + dhāna] -- 1. putting up, putting down, placing, laying A.IV,41 (aggissa ādhānaṁ, v. l. of 6 MSS ādānaṁ). -- 2. receptacle M.I,414 (udak°), cp. ādheyya. ‹-› 3. enclosure, hedge Miln.220 (kaṇṭak° thorny brake, see under kaṇṭaka).

--gāhin holding one’s own place, i. e. obstinate (?), reading uncertain & interchanging with ādāna, only in one ster. phrase, viz. sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsin ādhāna-gāhin duppaṭinissaggin Vin.II,89; M.I,43, 96; A.III,335 (v. l. ādāna°, C. expl^s by daḷhagāhin); D.III,247 (adhāna°). (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādhāra: {'def': '【阳】容器，固定器，基础，支持，台子。 ~ka, 【中】凳子，台子。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + dhāra] -- 1. a container, receptacle, basin, lit. holder A.III,27; J.VI,257. -- 2. “holding up”, i. e. support, basis, prop. esp. a (round) stool or stand for the alms-bowl (patta) Vin.II,113 (an° patto); M.III,95; S.V,21; J.V,202. -- fig. S.V,20 (an° without a support, cittaṁ); Vism.8, 444. -- 3. (tt. g.) name for the Loc. case (“resting on”) Sn.211. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādhāraka: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [ā + dhāraka, or simply ādhāra + ka] -- 1. a stool or stand (as ādhāra²) (always m., except at J.I,33 where °āni pl. nt.) J.I,33; DhA.III,290 = VvA.220; DhA.III,120 = 186 (one of the four priceless things of a Tathāgata, viz.: setacchattaṁ, nisīdanapallaṅko, ādhārako pādapīṭhaṁ). -- 2. a reading desk, pulpit J.III,235; IV,299. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādhāraṇatā: {'def': '(f.) [ā + dhāraṇatā] concentration, attention, mindfulness SnA 290 (+ daḷhīkaraṇa), 398 (id.). (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādhārita: {'def': '[pp. of ā + dhāreti, cp. dhāreti¹] supported, held up Miln.68. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādhāvana: {'def': '【中】突进，猛冲。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ādhāvati] onrush, violent motion Miln.135. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādhāvati: {'def': '(a + dhāv + a) 跑向。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + dhavati¹] to run towards a goal, to run after M.I,265 (where id. p. S.II,26 has upadh°); DA.I,39. Freq. in comb^n. ādhāvati paridhāvati to run about, e. g. J.I,127, 134, 158; II,68. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādi: {'def': '[Sk. ādi, etym. uncertain] -- 1. (m.) starting-point, beginning Sn.358 (Acc. ādiṁ = kāraṇaṁ SnA 351); Dh.375 (Nom. ādi); Miln.10 (ādimhi); J.VI,567 (Abl. ādito from the beginning). For use as nt. see below 2 b. -- 2. (adj. & adv.) (a) (°-) beginning, initially, first, principal, chief: see cpds. -- (b) (°-) beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed to be familiar in its constituents to the reader or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i. e. and so on, so forth (cp. adhika); e. g. rukkha-gumb-ādayo (Acc. pl.) trees, jungle etc. J.I,150; amba-panas’ādīhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar kinds of fruit) J.I,278; amba-labuj’ādīnaṁ phalānaṁ anto J.II,159; asi-satti-dhami-ādīni āvudhāni (weapous, such as sword, knife, bow & the like) J.I,150; kasi-gorakkh’ādīni karonte manusse J.II,128; . . . ti ādinā nayena in this and similar ways J.I,81; PvA.30. Absolute as nt. pl. ādinī with ti (evaṁ) (ādīni), closing a quotation, meaning “this and such like”, e. g. at J.II,128, 416 (ti ādīni viravitvā). -- In phrase ādiṁ katvā meaning “putting (him, her, it) first”, i. e. heginning with, from . . . on, from . . . down (c. Acc.) e. g. DhA.I,393 (rājānaṁ ādiṁ K. from the king down); PvA.20 (vihāraṁ ādikatvā), 21 (pañcavaggiye ādiṁ K.).

--kammika [cp. BSk. ādikarmaka Divy 544] a beginner Vin.III,146; IV,100; Miln.59; Vism.241; DhsA.187. --kalyāṇa in phrase ādikalyāṇa majjhe-kalyāṇa pariyosāna-kalyāṇa of the Dhamma, “beautiful in the beginning, the middle & the end” see references under dhamma C. 3 and cp. DA.I,175 (= ādimhi kalyāṇa etc.); SnA 444; abstr. °kalyāṇatā Vism.4. --pubbaṅgama original Dpvs.IV,26. --brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life D.I,189; III,284; M.I,431; II,125, 211; III, 192; S.II,75, 223; IV,91; V,417, 438; f. °ikā Vin.I,64, 68; A.I,231 sq. --majjhapariyosāna beginning, middle & end Miln.10; cp. above ādikalyāṇa. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】出发点，开始。【形】第一，首先。【中】等等。~kammika,【阳】初学者。~kalyāṇa,【形】美丽的最初。~ma,【形】最初的。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādicca: {'def': '[Vedic āditya] the sun S.I,15, 47; II,284; III,156; V,44, 101; A.I,242; V,22, 263, 266 sq.; It.85; Sn.550, 569, 1097 (“ādicco vuccati suriyo” Nd² 125); DhA.IV,143; Sdhp.14, 17, 40.

--upaṭṭhānā sun-worship D.I,11 (= jīvikatthāya ādiccaparicariyā DA.I,97); J.II,72 (°jātaka; ādiccaṁ upatiṭṭhati p. 73 = suriyaṁ namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.). --patha the path of the sun, i. e. the sky, the heavens Dh.175 (= ākāsa DhA.III,177). --bandhu “kinsman of the sun”, Ep. of the Buddha Vin.II,296; S.I,186, 192; A.II,54; Sn.54, 915, 1128; Nd¹ 341; Nd² 125^b; Vv 42⁵, 78¹⁰; VvA.116. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】太阳。 ~patha, 【阳】天空。 ~bandhu, 【阳】太阳的亲属，太阳的种族。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādika: {'def': '(adj.) [ādi + ka] from the beginning, initial (see adhika); Instr. ādikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time M.I,395, 479; II,213; S.II,224; J.VI,567. Cp. ādiya³. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】等等。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādina: {'def': 'only at D.I,115 (T. reading ādīna, but v. l. S id. ādina, B p. abhinna) in phrase ādina-khattiya-kula primordial. See note in Dial. I.148. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādinna: {'def': '(ādāti 的【过分】), 已拿，已抓住。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādisati: {'def': '[ā + disati] (a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to. -- (b) to dedicate (a gift, dakkhiṇaṁ or dānaṁ). ‹-› pres. ind. ādisati D.I,213 = A.I,170 (tell or read one’s character); Sn.1112 (atītaṁ); Nd¹ 382 (nakkhattaṁ set the horoscope); Miln.294 (dānaṁ); pot. ādiseyya Th.2, 307 (dakkhiṇaṁ); Pv IV.1³⁰ (id. = uddiseyya PvA.228), & ādise Vin.I,229 = D.II,88 (dakkhiṇaṁ); imper. ādisa PvA.49. -- fut. ādissati Th.2, 308 (dakkhiṇaṁ) PvA.88 (id.). -- aor. ādisi Pv.II,2⁸; PvA.46 (dakkhiṇaṁ); pl. ādisiṁsu ibid. 53 (id.) & ādisuṁ Pv.I,10⁶ (id.). -- ger. ādissa Vin.III,127; Sn.1018; Pv.II,1⁶ (dānaṁ), & ādisitvāna Th.2, 311. -- grd. ādissa (adj.) to be told or shown M.I,12. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + dis + a), 指出，讲述，公布。 ādisi, 【过】。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādiso: {'def': '(adv.) [orig. Abl. of ādi, formed with °saḥ] from the beginning, i. e. thoroughly, absolutely D.I,180; M.III,208. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādissa: {'def': '² (adj.) blameworthy M.I,12; MA =garāyha. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ at M.III,133 is an imper. pres. meaning “take”, & should probably better be read ādiya (in corresponsion with ādāna). It is not grd. of ādisati, which its form might suggest. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādito: {'def': '【副】起先，从开始。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āditta: {'def': '(ādippati 的【过分】), 已炽烧，已燃。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + ditta¹, Sk. ādīpta, pp. of ā + dīp] set on fire, blazing, burning Vin.I,34; Kv 209 (sabbaṁ ādittaṁ); S.III,71; IV,19, 108; A.IV,320 (°cela); Sn.591; J.IV,391; Pv.I,8⁵ (= paditta jalita PvA.41); Kvu 209; DA.I,264; PvA.149; Sdhp.599.

--pariyāya the discourse or sermon on the fire (lit. being in fllames) S.IV,168 sq.; Vin.I,34; DhA.I,88. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādiya: {'def': '⁴ ger. of ādiyati. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) grd. of admi, ad, Sk. ādya] edible, eatable A.III,45 (bhojanāni). (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² in °mukha is uncertain reading at A.III,164 sq. (vv. ll. ādeyya° & ādheyya), meaning perhaps “graspmouth”, i. e. gossip; thus equal to ger. of ādiyati¹. Perhaps to be taken to ādiyati². The same phrase occurs at Pug.65 (T. ādheyya°, C. has v. l. ādheyya°) where Pug.A 248 expl^ns. “ādito dheyyamukho, paṭhama-vacanasmiṁ yeva ṭhapita-mukho ti attho” (sticking to one’s word?). See ādheyya. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ = ādika, Instr. ādiyena in the beginning J.VI,567 (= ādikena C.). (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādiyanatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. formation ādiyana (fr. ādiya ger. of ādiyati) + ta] in an° the fact of not taking up or heeding SnA 516. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādiyati: {'def': '(ā + dā + i + ya), 拿起来，抓住。（这是被动的词基，却有主动的意义）。 ādiyi, 【过】。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [ā + diyati, med. pass. base of dadāti⁴, viz. di° & dī°; see also ādāti & ādeti] to take up; take to oneself, seize on, grasp, appropriate, fig. take notice of, take to heart, heed. -- pres. ādiyati A IIJ.46; Sn.119, 156, 633, 785, Nd¹ 67; Nd² 123, 124; J.III,296: V.367. -- pot. ādiye Sn.400; imper. ādiya M.III,133 (so read for ādissa?). -- aor. ādiyi D.III,65; A.III,209, ādiyāsi Pv IV.1⁴⁸ (sayaṁ daṇḍaṁ ā. = acchinditvā gaṇhasi PvA.241), & ādapayi (Caus. formation fr. ādāti?) to take heed S.I,132 (v. l. ādiyi, trsl. “put this into thy mind”). -- ger. ādiyitvā Vin.IV,120 (= ādā); J.II,224 (C. for ādiya T.); III,104; IV,352 (an° not heeding; v. l. anāditvā, cp. anādiyanto not attending J.III,196); DhA.III,32 (id.); PvA.13 (T. anādayitva not heeding), 212 (vacanaṁ anādiyitvā not paying attention to his word), ādiya S.III,26 (v. l. an° for anādīya); J.II,223 (= ādiyitvā C.); see also ādiya², & ādīya S.III,26 (an°). See also upādiyati & pariyādiyati. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [ā + diyati, Sk. ādīryate, Pass. of dṛ to split: see etym. under darī] to split, go asunder, break Ps.I,49. ‹-› pp. ādiṇṇa. See also avadīyati. Cp. also upādiṇṇa. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādiṇṇa: {'def': '[Sk. ādīrṇa, pp. of ā + dṛ, see ādiyati²] broken, split open S.IV,193 (= sipātikā with burst pod); cp. M.I,306. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādiṇṇata: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. ādiṇṇa] state of being broken or split Ps.I,49. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādu: {'def': '【无】或，但是。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [see also adu] emphatic (adversative) part. (1) of affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather J.III, 499 = VI,443; V,180; VI,552. -- (2) as 2^nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udāhu . . . ādu (= kiṁ . . . udāhu SnA 350), viz. is it so . . . or” Th.1, 1274 = Sn.354; Pv IV.3¹⁷ = DhA.I,31; J.V,384; VI,382; without udāhu at J.V,460 (adu). The close connection with udāhu suggests an expl^n. of ādu as a somehow distorted abbreviation of udāhu. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādā: {'def': '[ger. of ādāti from reduced base *da of dadāti 1^b] taking up, taking to oneself Vin.IV,120 (= anādiyitvā C.; cp. the usual form ādāya). (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'ādāya, (ādāti 的【独】), 拿了。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādāna: {'def': '(nt.) [ād + āna, or directly from ā + dā, base 1 of dadāti] taking up, getting, grasping, seizing; fig. appropriating, clinging to the world, seizing on (worldly objects). (1) (lit.) taking (food), pasturing M.III,133; J.V,371 (& °esana). -- (2) getting, acquiring, taking, seizing S.II,94; A.IV,400 (daṇḍ°); PvA.27 (phal°); esp. freq. in adinn° seizing what is not given, i. e. theft: see under adinna. -- (3) (fig.) attachment, clinging A.V,233, 253 (°paṭinissagga); Dh.89 (id.; cp. DhA.II,163); Sn.1103 (°taṇhā), 1104 (°satta); Nd¹ 98 (°gantha); Nd² 123, 124. --an° free from attachment S.I,236 (sādānesu anādāno “not laying hold mong them that grip” trsl.); A.II,10; It.109; J.IV,354; Miln.342; DhA.IV,70 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇo). Cp. upa°, pari°. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】拿起来，抓着。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādāsa: {'def': '[Sk. ādarśa, ā + dṛś, P. dass, of dassati¹ 2] a mirror Vin.II,107; D.I,7, 11 (°pañha mirror-questioning, cp. DA.I,97: “ādāse devataṁ otaretvā pañha-pucchanaṁ”), 80; II,93 (dhamna’-ādāsaṁ nāma dhamma-pariyāyaṁ desessāmi); S.V,357 (id.); A.V,92, 97 sq., 103; J.I,504; Dhs.617 (°maṇḍala); Vism.591 (in simile); KhA 50 (°daṇḍa) 237; DhA.I,226.

--tala the surface of the mirror, in similes at Vism.450, 456, 489. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】镜子。 ~tala, 【中】镜面，镜子的表面。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādāsaka: {'def': '= ādāsa Th.2, 411. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādātabba: {'def': '【潜】应该拿。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādāti: {'def': '(Ādadāti) [ā + dadāti of dadāti base 1 dā] to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; grd. ādātabba Vin.I,50; inf. ādātuṁ D.III,133 (adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ā.). ‹-› ger. ādā & ādāya (see sep.); grd. ādeyya, Caus. ādapeti (q. v.). -- See also ādiyati & ādeti. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + dā + a), 拿，抓住。 ādiyi, 【过】。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādāya: {'def': '[ger. of ādāti, either from base 1 of dadāti (dā) or base 2 (dāy). See also ādiya] having received or taken, taking up, seizing on, receiving; freq. used in the sense of a prep. “with” (c. Acc.) Sn.120, 247, 452; J.V,13; Vbh.245; DhA.II,74; SnA 139; PvA.10, 13, 38, 61 etc. -- At Vin.I,70 the form ādāya is used as a noun f. ādāyā in meaning of “a casually taken up belief” (tassa ādāyassa vaṇṇe bhaṇati). Cp. upa°, pari°. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādāyī: {'def': '【阳】拿的人。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādāyīn: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. ā + dadāti base 2, cp. ādāya] taking up, grasping, receiving; one who takes, seīzes or appropriates D.I,4 (dinn°); A.III,80; V,137 (sār°); DA.I,72. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādīna: {'def': 'at D.I,115 & S.V,74 (vv. ll. ādina, & abhinna) see ādina. See diṇṇa. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādīnava: {'def': '[ā + dīna + va (nt.), a substantivised adj., orig. meaning “full of wretchedness”, cp. BSk. ādīnava M Vastu III,297 (misery); Divy 329] disadvantage, danger (in or through = Loc.) D.I,38 (vedanānaṁ assādañ ca ādīnavañ ca etc.), 213 (iddhi-pāṭihāriye M.I,318; S.I,9 (ettha bhīyo); II,170 sq. (dhātūnaṁ); III,27, 62, 102 (rūpassa etc.); IV,7, 168; A.I,57 (akaraṇīye kayiramāne) 258 (ko loke assādo); III,250 sq.; 267 sq. (duccarite), 270 (puggala-ppasāde); IV,439 sq.; V,81; J.I,146; IV,2; It.9 = A.II,10 = Nd² 172^a; Sn.36, 50 (cp. Nd² 127), 69, 424, 732; Th.2, 17 (kāye ā. = dosa ThA.23), 485 (kāmesu ā. = dosa ThA.287); Pv III,10⁷ (= dosa PvA.214); IV,6⁷ (= dosa PvA.263); Ps.I,192 sq.; II,9, 10; PvA.12, 208. -- There are several sets of sources of evil or danger, viz. five dussīlassa sīla-vipattiyā ā. at D.II,85 = III,235 = A.III,252; five akkhantiyā ā. at Vbh.378; six of six each at D.III,182 sq. -- In phrase kāmānaṁ ā. okāro saṅkileso D.I,110, 148; M.I,115; Nett 42; DhA 16.

--ânupassin realising the danger or evil of S.II,85 (upā dāniyesu dhammesu) abstr. °ânupassanā Vism.647 sq., 695. --dassāvin same as °ânupassin D.I,245 (an°); A.V,178 (id.); D.III,46; S.II,194, 269; A.III,146; V,181 sq.; Nd² 141. --pariyesanā search for danger in (-°) S.II,171; III,29; IV,8 sq. --saññā consciousness of danger D.I,7); III,253, 283; A.III,79. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】缺点。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ādīpanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of ā + dīpeti] to be explained Miln.270. (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ādīpita: {'def': '(ādīpeti 的【过分】), 已燃烧，已着火。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of ādīpeti, ā + caus. of dīp, cp. dīpeti] ablaze, in flames S.I,31 (loka; v. l. ādittaka) 108; J.V,366; DhA.III,32 (v. l. āditta). (Page 99)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgacchati: {'def': '[ā + gacchati, gam] to come to or towards, approach, go back, arive etc.

I. Forms (same arrangement as under gacchati): (1) √gacch: pres. āgacchati D.I,161; J.II,153; Pv IV.1⁵¹; fut. āgacchissati J.III,53; aor. āgacchi Pv.II,13³; PvA.64. -- (2) √gam: aor. āgamāsi PvA.81, āgamā D.I,108; J.III,128, and pl. āgamiṁsu J.I,118; fut. āgamissati VvA.3; PvA.122; ger. āgamma (q. v.) & āgantvā J.I,151; Miln.14; Caus. āgameti (q. v.). -- (3) √gā: aor. āgā Sn.841; Pv.I,12³ (= āgacchi PvA.64). -- pp. āgata (q. v.).

II. Mcanings: (1) to come to, approach, arrive D.I,108; Pv.I,11³; II,13³; Miln.14; to return, to come back (cp. āgata) PvA.81, 122. -- (2) to come into, to result, deserve (cp. āgama²) D.I,161 (gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ deserve blame, come to be blamed); Pv IV.1⁵¹ (get to, be a profit to = upakappati PvA.241). -- (3) to come by, to come out to (be understood as), to refer or be referred to, to be meant or understood (cp. āgata 3 & āgama 3) J.I,118 (tīṇi piṭakāni āgamiṁsu); SnA 321; VvA.3. See also āgamma. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + gam + a), 走过来，接近。āgacchi, āgami, 【过】。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgada: {'def': '(m.) & Āgadana (nt.) [ā + gad to speak] a word; talk, speech DA.I,66 (= vacana). (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgama: {'def': '[fr. ā + gam] -- 1. coming, approach, result, D.I,53 (āgamanaṁ pavattatī ti DA.I,160; cp. Sdhp.249 dukkh°). -- 2. that which one goes by, resource, reference, source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of(?) the Pātimokkha, Vin.II,95 = 249, or of the Four Nikāyas, DA.I,1, 2 (dīgh°). A def. at Vism.442 runs “antamaso opamma-vagga-mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇaṇaṁ”. See also āgata 2, for phrase āgat’āgama, handed down in the Canon, Vin Loc. cit. Svāgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv IV.1³³ (sv° = suṭṭhu āgat’āgamo, PvA.230); Miln.215. BSk. in same use and meaning, e. g. Divy 17, 333, āgamāni = the Four Nikāyas. -- 3. rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Sn.834 (āgamā parivitakkaṁ), cp. Davs.V,22 (takk°, discipline of right thought) Sdhp.224 (āgamato, in obedience to). ‹-› 4. meaning, understanding, KhA 107 (vaṇṇ°). -- 5. repayment (of a debt) J. VI,245. -- 6. as gram. tt. “augment”, a consonant or syllable added or inserted SnA 23 (sa-kār’āgama). (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 来，走进。 2. 宗教，圣经。 3. 插入的子音。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgamana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. āgacchati, Sk. same] oncoming, arrival, approach A.III,172; DA.I,160; PvA.4, 81; Sdhp.224, 356. an° not coming or returning J.I,203, 264. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】接近的，抵达。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgamayamāna: {'def': '【形】等候的，期待的。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgameti: {'def': '[caus of agacchati] to cause somebody or something to come to one, i. e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin.II,166, 182, 212; D.I,112, 113; S.IV,291; PvA.4, 55. ‹-› (2) to wait for, to welcome Vin.II,128 (ppr. āgamayamāna); M.I,161 (id.) J.I,69 (id. + kālaṁ). (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + gam + e), 等候，期待。 āgamesi, 【过】。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgamma: {'def': '(adv.) [orig. ger. of āgacchati, q. v. under I.2 for form & under II.3 for meaning. BSk. āgamya in meaning after the Pāli form, e. g. Divy 95, 405 (with Gen.); Av. Ś I.85, 210 etc.; M Vastu I.243, 313]. With reference to (c. Acc.), owing to, relating to; by means of, thanks to. In meaning nearly synonymous with ārabbha, sandhāya & paṭicca (see K. S. 318 s. v.) D.I,229; It.71; J.I,50; VI,424; Kh VIII,14 (= nissāya KhA 229); PvA.5, 21 etc. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(āgacchati 的【独】), 来了，由于，因…之缘故。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgantar: {'def': '[N. ag. fr. āgacchati] one who is coming or going to come A.I,63; II,159; It.4, 95 (Nom. āgantā only one MS, all others āgantvā). an° A.I,64; II,160. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgantu: {'def': '【阳】来的人。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. āgantu] -- 1. occasional, incidental J.VI,358. -- 2. an occasional arrival, a new comer, stranger J.VI,529 (= āgantuka-jana C.); ThA.16. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgantuka: {'def': '【三】客人，新来的人，陌生人。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [āgantu + ka; cp. BSk. āgantuka in same meaning as P. viz. āgantukā bhikṣavaḥ Av. Ś I.87, 286; Divy 50] -- 1. coming, arriving, new comer, guest, stranger, esp. a newly arrived bhikkhu; a visitor (opp. gamika one who goes away) Vin.I,132, 167; II,170; III, 65, 181; IV,24, A.I,10; III,41, 366; J.VI,333; Ud.25; DhA.II,54, 74; VvA.24; PvA.54. -- 2. adventitions, incidental (= āgantu¹) Miln.304 (of megha & roga). ‹-› 3. accessory, superimposed, added Vism.195.

--bhatta food given to a guest, meal for a visitor Vin.I,292 (opp. gamika°); II,16. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgata: {'def': '[pp. of āgacchati] (1) come, arrived Miln.18 (°kāraṇa the reason of his coming); VvA.78 (°ṭṭhāna); PvA.81 (kiṁ āgat’attha why have you come here) come by, got attained (°-) A.II,110 = Pug.48 (°visa); Mhvs XIV. 28 (°phala = anāgānuphala) --āgat’āgatā (pl.) people coming & going, passers by, all comers PvA.39, 78, 129; VvA.190 (Ep. of saṅgha). --sv’āgata “wel-come”, greeted, hailed; nt. welcome, hail Th.2, 337; Pv IV.3¹⁵, opp. durāgata not liked, unwelcome, A.II,117, 143, 153; III, 163; Th.2, 337. -- (2) come down, handed down (by memory, said of texts) D.I,88; DhA.II,35; KhA 229; VvA.30; āgatāgamo, one to whom the āgama, or the āgamas, have been handed down, Vin.I,127, 337; II 8; IV,158; A.II,147; Miln.19, 21. -- (3) anāgata not come yet, i. e. future; usually in comb^n. with atīta (past) & paccuppanna (present): see atīta and anāgata. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(āgacchati 的【过分】), 【中】来。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgati: {'def': '(f.) [ā + gati] coming, coming back, return S.III,53; J.II,172. Usually opp. to gati going away. Used in spe‹-› cial sense of rebirth and re-death in the course of saṁsāra. Thus in āgati gati cuti upapatti D.I,162; A.III,54 sq., 60 sq., 74; cp. also S.II,67; Pv.II,9²² (gatiṁ āgatiṁ vā). (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āghāta: {'def': '[Sk. āghāta only in lit. meaning of striking, killing, but cp. BSk. āghāta in meaning “hurtfulness” at M Vastu I.79; Av. Ś II.129; cp. ghāta & ghāteti] anger, ill-will, hatred, malice D.I,3, 31; III,72 sq.; S.I,179; J.I,113; Dhs.1060, 1231; Vbh.167, 362, 389; Miln.136; Vism.306; DA.I,52; VvA.67; PvA.178. --anāghāta freedom from ill will Vin.II,249; A.V,80.

--paṭivinaya repression of ill-will; the usual enum^n. of ā-° paṭivinayā comprises nine, for which see D.III,262, 289; Vin.V,137; A.IV,408; besides this there are sets of five at A.III,185 sq.; SnA 10, 11, and one of ten at Vin.V,138. --vatthu occasion of ill-will; closely connected with °paṭivinaya & like that enum^d. in sets of nine (Vin.V,137; A.IV,408; Ps.I,130; J.III,291, 404; V,149; Vbh.389; Nett 23; SnA 12), and of ten (Vin.V,138; A.V,150; Ps.I,130; Vbh.391). (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 激怒，憎恨。 2. 碰撞。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āghātana: {'def': '【中】屠宰场，处决的地方。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [ā + ghāta(na), cp. āghata which has changed its meaning] -- 1. slaying, striking, destroying, killing Th.1, 418, 711; death D.I,31 (= maraṇa DA.I,119). ‹-› 2. shambles, slaughter-house Vin.I,182 (gav°); A.IV,138; J.VI,113. -- 3. place of execution Vin.III,151; J.I,326, 439; III,59; Miln.110; DhA.IV,52; PvA.4, 5. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āghāteti: {'def': '[denom. fr. āghāta, in form = ā + ghāteti, but diff. in meaning] only in phrase cittaṁ a. (with Loc.) to incite one’s heart to hatred against, to obdurate one’s heart. Sdhp. 126 = S.I,151 = A.V,172. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgilāyati: {'def': '(ā + gilā + ya), 疲倦，痛。 āgilāyi, 【过】。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + gilāyati; Sk. glāyati, cp. gilāna] to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin.II,200; D.III,209; M.I,354; S.IV,184; KhA 66 (hadavaṁ ā.). Cp. āyamati. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgu: {'def': '【中】罪行，罪过。 ~cārī, 【阳】罪犯，坏人。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [for Vedic āgas nt.] guilt, offence, S.I,123; A.III,346; Sn.522 = Nd² 337 (in expl^n. of nāga as āguṁ na karotī ti nāgo); Nd¹ 201. Note. A reconstructed āgasa is found at Sdhp.294 in cpd. akatāgasa not having committed sin.

--cārin one who does evil, D.II,339; M.II,88; III,163; S.II,100, 128; A.II,240; Miln.110. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgālha: {'def': '【形】强壮的，粗糙的。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgāmin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [ā + gāmin] returning, one who returns, esp. one who returns to another form of life in saṁsāra (cp. āgati), one who is liable to rebirth A.I,63; II,159; It.95. See anāgāmin. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgāmitā: {'def': 'found only in neg. form anāgāmitā. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgāmī: {'def': '【形】来的，来的人。 ~kāla, 【阳】未来。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgāra: {'def': '(-°) see agāra. (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgāraka: {'def': '& °ika (adj.-n.) (-°) [cp. BSk. āgārika Divy 275, & agārika] belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control over the house, keeping, surveying, in cpds. koṭṭh° possessor or keeper of a storehouse Vin.I,209; bandhan° prison-keeper A.II,207; bhaṇḍ° keeper of wares, treasurer PvA.2 (see also bhaṇḍ°). -- (2) being in the house, sharing (the house), companion S.III,190 (paṁsv° playmate). (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āgārika: {'def': '【形】属于房子的。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āgāḷha: {'def': '(adj.) (ā + gāḷha 1; cp. Sk. samāgāḍhaṁ] strong, hard, harsh, rough (of speech), usually in Instr. as adv. āgāḷhena roughly, harshly a I.283, 295; Pug.32 (so to be read for agāḷhena, although Pug.A 215 has a°, but expl^s. by atigāḷhena vacanena); Instr. f. āgāḷhāya Vin v. 122 (ceteyya; Bdhgh. on p. 230 reads āgaḷāya and expl^s. by daḷhabhāvāya). See also Nett 77 (āgāḷhā paṭipadā a rough path), 95 (id.; v. l. agāḷhā). (Page 95)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āha: {'def': '【过完，叁，单】他已经说。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic āha, orig. perfect of ah to speak, meaning “he began to speak”, thus in meaning of pres. “he says”] a perfect in meaning of pret. & pres. “he says or he said”, he spoke, also spoke to somebody (w. Acc.), as at J.I,197 (cullalohitaṁ āha). Usually in 3^rd person, very rarely used of 2^nd person, as at Sn.839, 840 (= kathesi bhaṇasi Nd 188, 191). -- 3^rd sg. āha Vin.II,191; Sn.790 (= bhaṇati Nd¹ 87), 888; J.I,280; III,53 and freq. passim; 3^rd pl. āhu Sn.87, 181; Dh.345; J.I,59; SnA 377, and āhaṁsu J.I,222; III,278 and freq. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhacca: {'def': '【形】 1. 可移去的。 2. (āhanati 的【独】) 敲击，接触。 ~pādaka,【形】脚可移去的。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ ger. of āhanati. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [grd. of āharati, corresponding to a Sk. *āhṛtya] 1. (cp. āharati¹) to be removed, removable, in °pādaka-pīṭha & °mañca a collapsible bed or chair, i e. whose legs or feet can be put on & taken away at pleasure (by drawing out a pin) Vin.II,149 (cp. Vin Texts III,164 n. 5); IV,40, 46 (def. as “aṅge vijjhitvā ṭhito hoti” it stands by means of a perforated limb), 168, 169. -- 2. (cp. āharati²) reciting, repeating, or to be quoted, recitation (of the Scriptures); by authority or by tradition M.III,139; DhsA.9, & in cpds. °pada a text quoted from Scripture), tradition Miln.148 (°ena by reference to the text of the Scriptures); °vacana a saying of the Scriptures, a traditional or proverbial saying Nett 21 (in def. of suttaṁ). (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhanana: {'def': '【中】撞。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ā + han] beating, striking, coming into touch, “impinging” Vism.142 (+ pariyāhanana, in def. of vitakka) = DhsA.114 (cp. Expos. 151); Vism.515 (id.). (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhanati: {'def': '(ā + han + a), 打，袭击，触。 āhani, 【过】。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + han] to beat, strike, press against, touch ppr. āhananto Miln.21 (dhamma-bheriṁ); Dāvs.IV,50. ‹-› ger. āhacca touching M.I,493; J.I,330; VI 2, 200; Sn.716 = uppīḷetva SnA 498; Vism.420. -- pp. āhata (q. v.).

1st sg. fut. āhañhi Vin.I,8; D.II,72, where probably to be read as āhañh’(=āhañhaṁ). See Geiger, P.Gr. § 153, 2. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āharati: {'def': '(ā + har + a), 带来，接来，生产。 āhari, 【过】。 āharamāna, 【现分】。 āharitvā, 【独】。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + hṛ] -- 1. to take, take up, take hold of, take out, take away M.I,429 (sallaṁ); S I 121; III,123; J.I,40 (ger. āharitvā “with”), 293 (te hattaṁ); Nd² 540^c (puttamaṁsaṁ, read āhāreyya?); Pv.II,3¹⁰; DA.I,186, 188 ‹-› 2. to bring, bring down, fetch D.II,245; J IV 159 (nāvaṁ; v. l. āhāhitvā); V,466; VvA.63 (bhattaṁ); PvA.75. ‹-› 3. to get, acquire, bring upon oneself J.V,433 (padosaṁ); DhA.II,89. -- 4. to bring on to, put into (w. Loc.); fig. & intrs. to hold on to, put oneself to, touch, resort to M.I,395 (kaṭhalaṁ mukhe ā.; also inf. āhattuṁ); Th.1, 1156 (pāpacitte ā.; Mrs. Rh. D. Brethren ver. 1156, not as “accost” p. 419, n.). -- 5. to assault, strike, offend (for pāhari?) Th.1, 1173. -- 6. (fig.) to take up, fall or go back on (w. Acc.), recite, quote, repeat (usually with desanaṁ & dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) J.III,383 (desanaṁ), 401; V,462 (vatthuṁ āharitvā dassesi told a story for example); SnA 376; PvA.38, 39 (atītaṁ), 42, 66, 99 (dhamma-desanaṁ). See also payirudāharati. ‹-› pp. āhaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āhārapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take, to call or ask for J.III,88, 342; V,466; PvA.215. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āharaṇa: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. āharati] to be taken; taking away; only in phrase acorāharaṇo nidhi a treasure not to be taken by thieves Miln.320; Kh VIII,9; KhA 224; Sdhp.589. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】带来。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āharaṇaka: {'def': '[āharaṇa + ka] one who has to take or bring, a messenger J.II,199; III,328. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āharima: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āharati] “fetching”, fascinating, captivating, charming Vin.IV,299; Th.2, 299; ThA.227; VvA.14, 15, 77. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhariya: {'def': '[grd. of āharati] one who is to bring something J.III,328. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhata: {'def': '(āhanati 的【过分】) 已打，已影响，已折磨。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of āhanati] struck, beaten, stamped; afflicted, affected with (-°) Vin.IV,236 = D.III,238 (kupito anattamano āhata-citto); Vin.I,75, 76; S.I,170 (tilak°, so read for tilakā-hata, affected with freckles, C. kāḷa-setādi vaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagatta, K. S. p. 318); J III 456; Sdhp.187, 401. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhataka: {'def': '[fr. āhata] “one who is beaten”, a slave, a worker (of low grade) Vin.IV,224 (in def. of kammakāra, as bhaṭaka + ā). (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhavana: {'def': '& Āhavanīya see under āhuneyya. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhaṭa: {'def': '[pp. of āharati] brought, carried, obtained Vin.I,121; III,53; D.II,180 (spelt āhata); J.III,512 (gloss ānīta); Dāvs.I,58. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(āharati 的【过分】), 已带来。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āhika: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [der. fr. aha²] only in pañcāhika every five days (cp. pañcāhaṁ & sattāhaṁ) M.III,157. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhita: {'def': '[pp. of ā + dhā] put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a fire), blazing Sn.18 (gini = ābhato jalito vā SnA 28). See sam°. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】 1. 已放进。 2. 已燃烧。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āhiṇḍati: {'def': '(ā + hiḍ+ ŋ-a), 云游，漫游。 āhiṇḍi, 【过】。 āhiṇḍitvā, 【独】。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + hiṇḍ, cp. BSk. āhiṇḍate Divy 165 etc.] to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w. Acc.) Vin.I,203 (senāsana-cārikaṁ), 217; II, 132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṁ); IV,62; J.I,48, 108, 239; Nd² 540^B; Pv III,2²⁹ (= vicarati PvA.185); Vism.38, 284 (aṭaviṁ); VvA.238 (tattha tattha); PvA.143. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhu: {'def': '3^rd pl. of āha (q. v.). (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【复】 āha。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āhuna: {'def': '= āhuti, in āhuna-pāhuna giving oblations and sacrificing VvA.155; by itself at Vism.219. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhundarika: {'def': '【形】拥挤的，阻碍的。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [doubtful or āhuṇḍ°?] according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 73 “crowded up, blocked up, impassable” Vin.I,79; IV,297; Vism.413 (°ṁ andha-tamaṁ). (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhuneyya: {'def': '(adj.) [a grd. form. fr. ā + hu, cp. āhuti] sacrificial, worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful D.III,5, 217 (aggi); A.II,56, 70 (sāhuneyyaka), 145 sq. (id.); IV,13, 41 (aggi); It.88 (+ pāhuneyya); Vv 64³³ (cp. VvA.285). See def. at Vism.219 where expl^d. by “āhavanīya” and “āhavanaṁ arahati” deserving of offerings. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhuti: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic āhuti, ā + hu] oblation, sacrifice; veneration, adoration M III 167; S.I,141; Th.1, 566 (°īnaṁ paṭiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts); J.I,15; V,70 (id.); Vv 64³³ (paramâhutiṁ gato deserving the highest adoration); Sn.249, 458; Kvu 530; SnA 175; VvA.285. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】供奉，提供。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āhuṇa: {'def': '【中】崇拜，供奉。 āhuṇeyya, 【形】可崇拜的，可供奉的。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āhāra: {'def': '【阳】食物，营养物。 ~ṭṭhitika, 【形】依靠食物生活。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. ā + hṛ, lit. taking up or on to oneself] feeding, support, food, nutriment (lit & fig.). The term is used comprehensively and the usual enum^n. comprises four kinds of nutriment, viz. (1) kabaḷiṅkāra āhāro (bodily nutriment, either oḷāriko gross, solid, or sukhumo fine), (2) phassāhāro n. of contact, (3) manosañcetanā° n. of volition (= cetanā S. A. on II.11 f.), (4) viññāṇ° of consciousness. Thus at M.I,261; D.III,228, 276; Dhs.71--73; Vism.341. Another definition of Dhammapāla’s refers it to the fourfold tasting as asita (eaten), pīta (drunk), khāyita (chewed), sāyita (tasted) food PvA.25. A synonym with mūla, hetu, etc. for cause, Yamaka, I.3; Yam. A (J.P.T.S., 1910--12) 54. See on term also Dhs.trsl. 30. -- Vin.I,84; D.I,166; S.I,172; II,11, 13, 98 sq. (the 4 kinds, in detail); III,54 (sa°); V,64, 391; A.III,51 (sukhass°), 79, 142 sq., 192 sq.; IV,49, 108; V,52 (the four), 108, 113 (avijjāya etc.), 116 (bhavataṇhāya), 269 sq. (nerayikānaṁ etc.); Sn.78, 165, 707, 747; Nd¹ 25; Ps.I,22 (the four) 122 (id.), 55, 76 sq; Kvu 508; Pug.21, 55; Vbh.2, 13, 72, 89, 320, 383, 401 sq. (the four); Dhs.58, 121, 358, 646; Nett 31, 114, 124; DhsA.153, 401; DhA.I,183 (°ṁ pacchindati to bring up food, to vomit); II,87; VvA.118; PvA.14, 35, 112, 148 (utu° physical nutriment); Sdhp.100, 395, 406; A.V,136 gives ten āhāra opposed to ten paripanthā. --an° without food, unfed M.I,487 (aggi); S.III,126; V,105; Sn.985.

--ûpahāra consumption of food, feeding, eating Vin.III,136. --ṭhitika subsisting or living on food D.III,211, 273; A.V,50, 55; Ps.I,5, 122. --pariggaha taking up or acquirement of food Miln.244 or is it “restraint or abstinence in food”? Same comb^n. at Miln.313. --maya “food-like”, feeding stuff, food J.III,523. --lolatā greed after food SnA 35. --samudaya origin of nutriment S.III,59. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhāratthaṁ: {'def': '[āhāra + tta] the state of being food. In the idiom āhārattaṇ pharati; Vin.I,199, of medicine, “to penetrate into food-ness” , to come under the category of food; Miln.152, of poison, to turn into food. [According to Oldenberg (Vin.I,381) his MSS read about equally °attaṁ and °atthaṁ. Trenckner prints °atthaṁ, and records no variant (see p. 425)]. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āhāreti: {'def': '[denom. fr. āhāra] to take food, eat, feed on S.II,13; III,240; IV,104; A.I,114, 295; II,40, 145, 206; IV, 167; Nd² 540^c (āhāraṁ & puttamaṁsaṁ cp. S.II,98). (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + har + e), 吃，用餐。 āhāresi, 【过】。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ājava: {'def': 'see ācamā. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājañña: {'def': 'is the contracted form of ājāniya. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājira: {'def': '[= ajira with lengthened initial a] a courtyard Mhvs 35, 3. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājāna: {'def': '(adj.) [ā + jāna from jñā] understandable, only in cpd. durājāna hard to understand S.IV,127; Sn.762; J.I,295, 300. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājānana: {'def': '【中】知识。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [ā + jānana, cp. Sk. ajñāna] learning, knowing, understanding; knowledge J.I,181 (°sabhāva of the character of knowing, fit to learn); PvA.225. (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājānāti: {'def': '(ā + ñā + nā), 知道，理解。 ājāni, 【过】。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + jānāti] to understand, to know, to learn D.I,189; Sn.1064 (°amāna = vijānamāna Nd² 120). As aññāti at Vism.200. -- pp. aññāta. Cp. also āṇāpeti. Ājāniya (ājānīya) (adj. n.) [cp. BSk. ājāneya & Sk. ājāti birth, good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from ā + jan (to be born, i. e. well-born) it is by Bdhgh. connected with ā + jñā (to learn, i. e. to be trained). See for these popular etym. e. g. J.I,181: sārathissa cittarucitaṁ kāraṇaṁ ājānana-sabhāvo ājañño, and DhA.IV,4: yaṁ assadamma-sārathi kāraṇaṁ kāreti tassa khippaṁ jānana‹-› samatthā ājāniyā. -- The contracted form of the word is ājañña] of good race or breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse (cp. assājāniya under assa³). (a) ājāniya (the more common & younger Pāli form): Sn.462, 528, 532; J.I,178, 194; Dpvs.IV,26; DhA.I,402; III,49; IV,4; VvA.78; PvA.216. -- (b) ājānīya: M.I,445; A.V,323; Dh.322 = Nd² 475. -- (c) ǡjañña = (mostly in poetry): Sn.300 = 304; J.I,181; Pv IV.1⁵⁴; purisājañña “a steed of man”, i. e. a man of noble race) S.III,91 = Th.1, 1084 = Sn.544 = VvA.9; A.V,325. --anājāniya of inferior birth M.I,367.

--susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal M.I,445 (°ûpamo dhamma-pariyāyo). (Page 96)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājānīya: {'def': '参考 ājañña。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ājānīyatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. ājāniya] good breed PvA.214. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājīva: {'def': '【阳】生计，生活，生存。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + jīva; Sk. ājīva] livelihood, mode of living, living, subsistence, D.I,54; A.III,124 (parisuddha°); Sn.407 (°ṁ = parisodhayi = micchājīvaṁ hitvā sammājīvaṁ eva pavattayī SnA 382), 617; Pug.51; Vbh.107, 235; Miln.229 (bhinna°); Vism.306 (id.); DhsA.390; Sdhp.342, 375, 392. Esp. freq. in the contrast pair sammā-ājīva & micchā-ā° right mode & wrong mode of gaining a living, e. g. at S.II,168 sq.; III,239; V,9; A.I,271; II 53, 240, 270; IV,82; Vbh.105, 246. See also magga (ariyaṭṭhaṅgika).

--pārisuddhi purity or propriety of livelihood Miln.336; Vism.22 sq., 44; DhA.IV,111. --vipatti failure in method of gaining a living A.I,270. --sampadā perfection of (right) livelihood A.I,271; DA.I,235. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājīvaka: {'def': 'ājīvika, 【阳】一种非佛教出家人，邪命外道。(p50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& °ika) [ājīva + ka, orig. “one finding his living” (scil. in a peculiar way); cp. BSk. ājīvika Divy 393, 427] an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non-buddhist ascetics. On their austerities, practice & way of living see esp. DhA.II,55 sq. and on the whole question A. L. Basham, Hist. & Doctrines of the Ājīvikas, 1951. -- (a) ājīvaka: Vin.I,291; II,284; IV,74, 91; M.I,31, 483: S.I,217; A.III,276, 384; J.I,81, 257, 390. -- (b) ājīvika: Vin.I,8; Sn.381 (v. l. BB. °aka).

--sāvaka a hearer or lay disciple of the ājīvaka ascetics Vin II 130, 165; A.I,217. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājīvika: {'def': '(nt.) (or ājīvikā f.?) [fr. ājīva] sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vbh.379 (°bhaya) Miln.196 (id.); PvA.274, and in phrase ājīvik’âpakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living M.I,463 = S.III,93 (T. reads jīvikā pakatā) = It.89 (reads ājīvikā pakatā) = Miln.279. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ājīvin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. ājīva] having one’s livelihood, finding one’s subsistence, living, leading a life of (-°) D.III,64; A.V,190 (lūkha°) (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākampita: {'def': '[pp. of ākampeti, Caus. of ā + kamp] shaking, trembling Miln.154 (°hadaya). (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已摇动，已发抖。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākantana: {'def': '(?) a possible reading, for the dürakantana of the text at Th.1, 1123, for which we might read durākantana. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākappa: {'def': '【阳】行为，举止。~sampanna,【形】好行为。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. ākalpa ā + kappa] 1. attire, appearance, Vin.I,44 (an°) = II.213; J.I,505. -- 2. deportment Dhs.713 (ā° gamanādi-ākāro DhsA.321).

--sampanna, suitably attired, well dressed, A.III,78; J.IV,542; an° sampanna, ill dressed, J.I,420. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākara: {'def': '【阳】矿，制造的地方。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. ākara] a mine, usually in cpd. ratan-ākara a mine of jewels Th.1, 1049; J.II,414; VI, 459; Dpvs.I,18. -- Cp. also Miln.356; VvA.13. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākassati: {'def': '(ā + kass + a), 拖拉，拉。 ākassi, 【过】。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + kassati] to draw along, draw after, plough, cultivate Nd¹ 428. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākaḍḍhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ākaḍḍhati] drawing away or to, pulling out, distraction VvA.212 (°parikaḍḍhana pulling about); DhsA.363; Miln.154 (°parikaḍḍhana), 352. -- As f. Vin.III,121. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】拉出，拖拉。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākaḍḍhati: {'def': '(a + kaḍḍh + a), 拉，拖拉。 ākaḍḍhi, 【过】。 ākaḍḍhita, 【过分】。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + kaḍḍhati] to pull along, pull to (oneself), drag or draw out, pull up Vin.II,325 (Bdhgh. for apakassati, see under apakāsati); IV,219; J.I,172, 192, 417; Miln.102, 135; ThA.117 (°eti); VvA.226; PvA.68. ‹-› Pass. ākaḍḍhiyati J.II,122 (°amāna-locana with eyes drawn away or attracted); Miln.102; Vism.163; VvA.207 (°amāna-hadaya with torn heart). -- pp. ākaḍḍhita. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākaḍḍhita: {'def': '[pp. of akaḍḍheti] pulled out, dragged along; upset, overthrown J.III,256 (= akkhitta²). (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākaṅkhamāna: {'def': '【现分】愿，需要。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākaṅkhana: {'def': '【中】ākaṅkhā,【阴】渴望的，希望，欲望。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākaṅkhati: {'def': '[ā + kāṅkṣ, cp. kaṅkhati] to wish for, think of, desire; intend, plan, design Vin.II,244 (°amāna); D.I,78, 176; S.I,46; Sn.569 (°amāna); Sn.p. 102 (= icchati SnA 436); DhA.I,29; SnA 229; VvA.149; PvA.229. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a + kakh + ŋ-a), 希望，需要。~khi,【过】。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākaṅkhā: {'def': 'f. [fr. ā + kāṅkṣ] longing, wish; as adj. at Th.1, 1030. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākhu: {'def': '[Vedic ākhu, fr. ā + khan, lit. the digger in, i. e. a mole; but given as rat or mouse by Halāyudha] a mouse or rat Pgdp 10. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鼠，老鼠。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākhyā: {'def': '【阴】命名。 ākhyikā, 【阴】故事。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākhyāta: {'def': '【中】谓语，动词。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākilāyati: {'def': 'v. l. at KhA 66 for āgilāyati. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākirati: {'def': '[ā + kirati] to strew over, scatter, sprinkle, disperse, fill, heap Sn.665; Dh.313; Pv.II,4⁹ (dānaṁ vipulaṁ ākiri = vippakirati PvA.92); Miln.175, 238, 323 (imper. ākirāhi); Sn.383. -- pp. ākiṇṇa. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + kir + a), 散播，散布。 ākiri, 【过】。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākiritatta: {'def': '(nt.) [ākirita + tta; abstr. fr. ākirita, pp. of ākirati Caus.] the fact or state of being filled or heaped with Miln.173 (sakataṁ dhaññassa ā). (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākiñcañña: {'def': '【中】无所有，缺少任何的所有物。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. akiñcana] state of having nothing, absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical t. t.; cp. below °āyatana & see Dhs.trsl. 74). -- Sn.976, 1070, 1115 (°sambhava, cp. Nd² 116); Th.2, 341 (= akiñcanabhāva ThA.240; trsl. “cherish no wordly wishes whatsoëer”); Nd² 115, see ākāsa; Miln.342.

--āyatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ākāsa°) D.I,35, 184; II,156; III,224, 253, 262 sq.; M.I,41, 165; II,254, 263; III,28, 44, S.IV,217; A.I,268; IV,40, 401; Ps.I,36; Nett 26, 39; Vism.333. See also jhāna & vimokkha. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākiṇṇa: {'def': '[pp. of ākirati] 1. strewn over, beset with, crowded, full of, dense, rich in (°-) Vin.III,130 (°loma with dense hair); S.I,204 (°kammanta “in motley tasks engaged”); IV,37 (gāmanto ā. bhikkhūhi etc.); A.III,104 (°vihāro); IV,4; V,15 (an° C. for appakiṇṇa); Sn.408 (°varalakkhaṇa = vipula-varalakkh° SnA 383); Pv.II,12⁴ (nānā-dijagaṇ° = āyutta PvA.157); Pug.31; PvA.32 (= parikiṇṇa); Sdhp.595. -- Freq. in idiomatic phrase describing a flourishing city “iddha phīta bahujana ākiṇṇa-manussa”, e. g. D.I,211; II,147 (°yakkha for °manussa; full of yakkhas, i. e. under their protection); A.III,215; cp. Miln.2 (°jana-manussa). -- 2. (uncertain whether to be taken as above 1 or as equal to avakiṇṇa fr. avakirati 2) dejected, base, vile, ruthless S.I,205 = J.III,309 = 539 = SnA 383. At K. S. 261, Mrs. Rh. D. translates “ruthless” & quotes C. as implying twofold exegesis of (a) impure, and (b) hard, ruthless. It is interesting to notice that Bdhgh. explains the same verse differently at SnA 383, viz. by vipula°, as above under Sn.408, & takes ākiṇṇaludda as vipulaludda, i. e. beset with cruelty, very or intensely cruel, thus referring it to ākiṇṇa 1. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākoṭana: {'def': '【中】敲，击，敦促，催促，驱策，赶（马等）。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. ākoṭeti] beating on, knocking M.I,385; Miln.63, 306; DhsA.144. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [= ākoṭana¹] beating, driving, inciting, urging J.VI,253 (f. ākoṭanī of paññā, expl^d. by “nivāraṇapatoda-laṭṭhi viya paññā koṭinī hoti” p. 254). (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākoṭeti: {'def': '[a + koṭṭeti, Sk. kuṭṭayati; BSk. ākoṭayati e. g. Divy 117 dvāraṁ trir ā°, Cowell “break” (?); Av. Ś. Index p. 222 s. v.] -- 1. to beat down, pound, stamp J.I,264. ‹-› 2. to beat, knock, thrash Vin.II,217; J.II,274; PvA.55 (aññamaññaṁ); Sdhp.159. -- 3. Esp. with ref. to knocking at the door, in phrases aggaḷaṁ ākoṭeti to beat on the bolt D.I,89; A.IV,359; V,65; DA.I,252 (cp. aggaḷa); dvāraṁ ā. J V 217; DhA.II,145; or simply ākoṭeti Vv 81¹⁷ (ākoṭayitvāna = appoṭetvā VvA.316). -- 4. (intrs.) to knock against anything J.I,239. -- pp. ākoṭita (q. v.). Caus. II. ākoṭapeti J.III,361. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + kuṭ + e), 敲击，打倒，压缩。~esi,【过】。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākoṭita: {'def': '[pp. of ākoṭeti] -- 1. beaten, touched, knocked against J.I,303; Miln.62 (of a gong). -- 2. pressed, beaten down (tight), flattened, in phrase ākoṭita-paccākoṭita flattened & pressed all round (of the cīvara) S.II, 281; DhA.I,37. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākucca: {'def': '(or °ā?) [etym. unknown, prob. non-Aryan] an iguana J.VI,538 (C. godhā; gloss amatt’ākuccā). (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākula: {'def': 'ākulībhūta, 【形】纠缠的，困惑的。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ā + *kul of which Sk.-P. kula, to Idg *qǔel to turn round, cp. also cakka & carati; lit. meaning “revolving quickly”, & so “confused”] entangled, confused, upset, twisted, bewildered J.I,123 (salākaggaṁ °ṁ karoti to upset or disturb); Vv 84⁹ (andha°); PvA.287 (an° clear). Often reduplicated as ākulākula thoroughly confused Miln.117, 220; PvA.56; ākula-pākula Ud.5 (so read for akkula-pakkula); ākula-samākula J.VI,270. ‹-› On phrase tantākula-jātā gulā-guṇṭhika-jātā see guḷā. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākulaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ākula] entangled D.II,55 (tant° for the usual tantākula, as given under guḷā). (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākulanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of ā + *kulāyati, denom. of kula] in an° not to be confounded or upset PvA.118. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākulī: {'def': '(-puppha) at KhA 60 (milāta°) read (according to Index p. 870) as milāta-bakula-puppha. Vism.260 (id. p.) however reads ākulī-puppha “tangle-flower” (?), cp. Ud.5, gāthā 7 bakkula, which is preferably to be read as pākula. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākurati: {'def': '[onomat. to sound-root *kur = *kor as in Lat. cornix, corvus etc. See gala note 2 B and cp. kukkuṭa kokila, khaṭa etc., all words expressing a rasping noise in the throat. The attempts at etym. by Trenckner (Miln.p. 425 as denom. of ākula) & Morris (J.P.T.S. 1886, 154 as contr. denom. of aṅkura “intumescence”, thus meaning “to swell”) are hardly correct] to be hoarse Miln.152 (kaṇṭho ākurati). (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākāra: {'def': '[a + karoti, kṛ] “the (way of) making”, i. e. (1) state, condition J.I,237 (avasan° condition of inhabitability); II,154 (patan° state of falling, labile equilibrium), cp. paṇṇ°. -- (2) property, quality, attribute D.I,76 (anāvila sabb°-sampanna endowed with all good qualities, of a jewel); II,157 (°varûpeta); J.II,352 (sabb° paripuṇṇa altogether perfect in qualities). -- (3) sign, appearance, form, D.I,175; J.I,266 (chātak° sign of hunger); Miln.24 (°ena by the sign of . .); VvA.27 (therassa ā. form of the Th.); PvA.90, 283 (rañño ā. the king’s person); Sdhp.363. -- (4) way, mode, manner, sa-ākāra in all their modes D.I,13 = 82 = III,111; J.I,266 (āgaman° the mode of his coming). Esp. in Instr. sg. & pl. with num. or pron. (in this way, in two ways etc.): chah’ākārehi in a sixfold manner Nd² 680 (cp. kāraṇehi in same sense); Nett 73, 74 (dvādasah’ākārehi); Vism.613 (navah’ākārehi indriyāni tikkhāni bhavanti); PvA.64 (yen’ākārena āgato ten’ākārena gato as he came so he went), 99 (id.). ‹-› (5) reason, ground, account D.I,138, 139; Nett 4, 8 sq., 38; DhA.I,14; KhA 100 (in expl^n. of evaṁ). In this meaning freq. with dass (dasseti, dassana, nidassana etc.) in commentary style “what is meant by”, the (statement of) reason why or of, notion, idea PvA.26 (dātabb°dassana), 27 (thoman°-dassana), 75 (kāruññ °ṁ dassesi), 121 (pucchan°-nidassanaṁ what has been asked); SnA 135 (°nidassana).

--parivitakka study of conditions, careful consideration, examination of reasons S.II,115; IV,138; A.II,191 = Nd² 151. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】样子，情况，境界，外表。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ākāraka: {'def': '(nt.) [ākāra + ka] appearance; reason, manner (cp. ākāra⁴) J.I,269 (ākārakena = kāraṇena C.). (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākāravant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ākāra] having a reason, reasonable, founded M.I,401 (saddhā). (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākāsa: {'def': '【阳】天空，空间。~gaṅgā,【阴】天河。~cārī,【形】空中飞行。~ṭṭha,【形】位于天空的，住在天空的。~tala,【中】一楝建筑物的平坦屋顶。~dhātu, 【阴】空界，虚空元素。即是：醚、以太。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.?) a game, playing chess “in the air” (sans voir) Vin.II,10 = D.I,6 (= aṭṭhapada-dasapadesu viya ākāse yeva kiḷanaṁ DA.I,85). (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. ākāśa fr. ā + kāś, lit. shining forth, i. e. the illuminated space] air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept see Cpd. 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etym. of ākāsa (fr. ā + kassati of kṛṣ) at DhsA.325 see Dhs.trsl. 178. ‹-› D.I,55 (°ṁ indriyāni saṅkamanti the sense-faculties pass into space); III,224, 253, 262, 265; S.III,207; IV,218; V,49, 264; J.I,253; II,353; III,52, 188; IV,154; VI,126; Sn.944, 1065; Nd¹ 428; Pv.II,1¹⁸; SnA 110, 152; PvA.93; Sdhp.42, 464. --ākāsena gacchati to go through the air PvA.75 (āgacch°), 103, 105, 162; °ena carati id. J.II,103; °e gacchati id. PvA.65 (cando). -- Formula “ananto ākāso” freq.; e. g. at D.I,183; A.II,184; IV, 40, 410 sq.; V,345.

--anta “the end of the sky”, the sky, the air (on °anta see anta¹ 4) J.VI,89. --ānañca (or ânañca) the infinity ef space, in cpd. °āyatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the “space-infinity-plane”, the sphere of unbounded space. The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4 (or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing beyond the fourth jhāna, viz. (1) ākās°, (2) viññāṇ’ānañc-āyatana (3) ākiñcaññ°, (4) n’eva saññānâsaññ°, (5) nirodha, (6) phala. -- D.I,34, 183; II,70, 112, 156; III,224, 262 sq.; M.I,41, 159.; III, 27, 44; S.V,119; Ps.I,36; Dhs.205, 501, 579, 1418; Nett 26, 39; Vism.326, 340, 453; DA.I,120 (see Nd² under ākāsa; Dhs.265 sq.; Dhs.trsl. 71). As classed with jhāna see also Nd² 672 (sādhu-vihārin). --kasiṇa one of the kasiṇ’āyatanas (see under kasiṇa) D.III,268; A.I,41. --gaṅgā N. of the celestial river J.I,95; III,344. --gamana going through the air (as a trick of elephants) Miln.201. --cārika walking through the air J.II,103. --cārin = °cārika VvA.6. --ṭṭha living in the sky (of devatā) Bu I.29; Miln.181, 285; KhA 120; SnA 476. --tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace SnA 87. --dhātu the element of space D.III,247; M.I,423; III,31; A.I,176; III,34; Dhs.638. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākāsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [ākāsa + ka] being in or belonging to the air or sky J.VI,124. (Page 93)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ākāsati: {'def': '[fr. ākāsa¹] to shine J.VI,89. (Page 94)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālaggeti: {'def': '[ā + Caus. of lag] to (make) hang on to (Loc.), to stick on, fasten to Vin.II,110 (pattaṁ veḷagge ālaggetvā). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + lag + e), 悬挂在，拴紧。 ālaggesi, 【过】。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ālaka-manda: {'def': '[ālaya°?] at Vin.II,152 is of uncertain reading and meaning (“open to view”? or “not having pegs” = āḷaka?) vv. ll. āḷakamanta & ālakamandāra; Bdhgh on p. 321 expl^ns. āḷakamandā ti ekaṅgaṇā manussâbhikiṇṇā, i. e. full of a crowd of people, Ch. quotes ālakamandā as “the city of Kuvera” (cp. Sk. alakā). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālamba: {'def': '[Sk. ālamba, ā + lamb] anything to hang on, support S.I,53 (an° without support); Sn.173 (id. + appatiṭṭha); J.III,396; Miln.343; Sdhp.245, 463. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 支援。 2. 帮助。 3. 任何可倚赖的。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ālambana: {'def': '【中】 1. 感官的对象。 2. 悬挂下。 3. 支援。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. ā + lamb, cp. ālamba] (adj.) hanging down from, hanging up J.III,396; IV,457; SnA 214. -- (nt.) support, balustrade (or screen?) Vin.II,117, 152 (°bāha) Miln.126. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālambara: {'def': '【阳】一种鼓。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Āḷambara (nt.) [Sk. āḍambara] a drum Vin.I,15 (l); J.II,344 (ḷ); V,390 (l); Vv 54¹⁸ (ḷ). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālambati: {'def': '(ā + lab + ŋ-a), 靠着，抓住。 ālambi, 【过】。 ālambita, 【过分】。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + lamb] to hang on to or up, to take hold of, to fasten to Vin.I,28, J.I,57; VI,192; Vv 84⁴⁸; ThA.34. -- ālambeti id. VvA.32. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālapana: {'def': '【中】致词，会话。ālapanā,【呼，阴】恳求。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) & Ālapanā (f.) [fr. ā + lap] talking to, addressing, conversation Vin.III,73 (with ref. to exclam. “ambho”); J.V,253 (°ā); Vism.23 (°ā); SnA 396; PvA.131 (re ti ā.). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālapanatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. ālapana] speaking to, conversing with, conversation M.I,331) (an°). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālapati: {'def': '[ā + lapati] to address S.I,177, 212; J.V,201; SnA 42, 347, 383, 394 (= āmantayi of Sn.997), 487 (‹-› avhayati); PvA.11, 13, 33, 69. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a + lap + a), 交谈，致词。 ālapi, 【过】。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ālasiya: {'def': 'ālasya, 【中】怠惰，懒惰。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ālassa: {'def': '(nt.) [Der. fr. alasa] sloth, idleness, laziness S.I,43; D.III,182; A.IV,59; V,136; Sdhp.567. Spelling also ālasya S.I,43 (v. l. BB); Vbh.352; Miln.289, and ālasiya J.I,427; DA.I,310; DhA.I,299; VvA.43. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālaya: {'def': '【阳】 1. 住所，栖息所，卧室。 2. 需要，执着。 3. 伪装。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. ālaya, ā + lī, līyate, cp. allīna & allīyati, also nirālaya] -- 1. orig. roosting place, perch, i. e. abode settling place, house J.I,10 (geh°); Miln.213; DhA.II,162 (an° = anoka), 170 (= oka). -- 2. “hanging on”, attachment, desire, clinging, lust S.I,136 = Vin.I,4 (°rāma “devoted to the things to which it clings” K. S.); Vin.III,20, 111; S.IV,372 (an°); V,421 sq. (id.); A.II,34, 131 (°rāma); III,35; It.88; Sn.177 (kām° = kāmesu taṇhā-diṭṭhi-vasena duvidho ālayo SnA 216), 535 (+ āsavāni), 635; Nett 121, 123 (°samugghāta); Vism.293 (id.), 497; Miln.203 (Buddh °ṁ akāsi?); DhA.I,121; IV,186 (= taṇhā); SnA 468 (= anoka of Sn.366). -- 3. pretence, pretext, feint [cp. BSk. ālaya M Vastu III,314] J.I,157 (gilān°), 438; III,533 (mat°); IV,37 (gabbhinī); VI 20, 262 (gilān°). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālayati: {'def': 'see allīyati. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālepa: {'def': '[cp. Sk. ālepa, of ā + lip] ointment, salve, liniment Vin.I,274; Miln.74; DhsA.249. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】药膏，石膏。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ālepana: {'def': '【中】涂抹，涂以灰泥，敷以膏药。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ā + lip] anointing, application of salve D.I,7 (mukkh°). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āli: {'def': '² & Āḷi (f.) [Sk. ālī] a dike, embankment Vin.II,256; M.III,96; A.II,166 (°pabbheda); III,28; J.I,336; III,533, 334. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】堤防，筑堤。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (m. or f.? [Sk. āḷi] a certain kind of fish J.V,405. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālika: {'def': 'in saccālika at S.IV,306 is sacc°alika distortion of truth, falsehood S.IV,306. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālikhati: {'def': '(ā + likh + a) 描绘，画像。 ālikhi, 【过】。 ālikhita, 【过分】。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + likhati] to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing J.I,71; Miln.51. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālimpana: {'def': '【中】 1. 涂。 2. 烧。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [for āḷimp° = Sk. ādīpana, see ālimpeti²] conflagration, burning, flame Miln.43. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālimpeti: {'def': '² [for Sk. ādīpayati, with change of d to l over ḷ and substitution of limp for ḷīp after analogy of roots in °mp, like lup › lump, lip › limp] to kindle, ignite, set fire to Vin.II,138 (dāyo ālimpetabbo); III,85; D.II,163 (citakaṁ); A.I,257; DhA.I,177 (āvāsaṁ read āvāpaṁ), 225; PvA.62 (kaṭṭhāni). -- pp. ālimpita (q. v.). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + lip + e), 1. 涂上，涂抹。 2. 纵火。 ālimpesi, 【过】。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. ālimpayati or ālepayati. ā + lip or limp] to smear, anoint Vin.II,107; S.IV,177 (vaṇaṁ). -- Caus. II. ālimpāpeti Vin.IV,316. -- Pass. ālimpīyati Miln.74 & ālippati DhA.IV,166 (v. l. for lippati). -- pp. ālitta (q. v.). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālimpita: {'def': '[pp. of ālimpeti²] ignited, lit. A.IV,102 (v. l. ālepita). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālinda: {'def': '(& Āḷinda) [Sk. alinda] a terrace or verandah before the house-door Vin.I,248; II,153; D.I,89; M.II,119; S.IV,290 (ḷ); A.V,65 (ḷ); J.VI,429; DA.I,252; DhA.I,26; IV,196; SnA 55 (°ka-vāsin; v. l. alindaka); Mhvs 35, 3. As ālindaka at J.III,283. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】在房子门前的阳台。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ālippati: {'def': 'Pass. of ālimpeti (q. v.). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālitta: {'def': '[pp. of ālimpati; Sk. ālipta] besmeared, stained Th.1, 737. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ālimpati 或 ālimpeti 的【过分】), 已涂，已沾染，已放火。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āliṅga: {'def': '[ā + liṅg] a small drum J.V,156 (suvaṇṇ°-tala). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āliṅgana: {'def': '【中】拥抱。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āliṅgati: {'def': '(a + liṅg + a), 拥抱。 āliṅgi, 【过】。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + liṅg] to embrace, enfold D.I,230; III,73; J.I,281; IV,21, 316, 438; V,8; Miln.7; DhA.I,101: VvA.260. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āliṅgiya: {'def': '【独】拥抱了。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āloka: {'def': '[ā + lok, Sk. āloka] seeing, sight (obj. & subj.), i. e. -- 1. sight, view, look S.IV,128 = Sn.763; A.III,236 (āloke nikkhitta laid before one’s eye). anāloka without sight, blind Miln.296 (andha +). -- 2. light A.I,164 (tamo vigato ā. uppanno) = It.100 (vihato); A.II,139 (four lights, i.e. canda°, suriya°, agg°, paññ°, of the moon, sun, fire & wisdom); J II 34; Dhs.617 (opp. andhakāra); VvA.51 (dīp°). -- 3. (clear) sight, power of observation, intuition, in comb^n. with vijjā knowledge D.II,33 = S.II,7 = 105, cp. Ps.II,150 sq. (obhāsaṭṭhena, S A. on II.7). -- 4. splendour VvA.53; DvA 71.

--kara making light, bringing light, n. light-bringer It.108. --karaṇa making light, illumining It.108. --da giving light or insight Th.1, 3. --dassana seeing light, i. e. perceiving Th.1, 422. --pharaṇa diffusing light or diffusion of light Vbh.334; Nett 89. --bahula good in sight, fig. full of foresight A.III,432. --bhūta light J VI 459. --saññā consciousness or faculty of sight or perception D.III,223; A.II,45; III,93 --saññin conscious of sight, i. e. susceptible to sight or insight D.III,49; M.III,3; A II 211; III,92, 323; IV,437; V,207; Pug.69. --sandhi “break for the light”, a slit to look through, an opening, a crack or casement Vin.I,48 = II.209 = 218; II,172; III,65; IV,47; J.IV,310; PvA.24. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】光。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ālokana: {'def': '【中】 1. 窗户。 2. 看着。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ā + lok] looking at, regarding DA.I,194. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālokasandhi: {'def': '【阳】窗户，让光照入的洞口。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āloketar: {'def': '[n. ag. to āloketi] one who looks forward or before, a beholder DA.I,194 (opp. viloketar). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āloketi: {'def': '(a + lok + e), 看着，向前看。 ālokesi, 【过】。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. ālokayati, ā + lok] to look before, look at, regard, see DA.I,193, 194. -- pp. ālokita (q. v.). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālokita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of āloketi] looking before, looking at, looking forward (opp. vilokitaṁ looking behind or backward), always in comb^n. ālokita-vilokita in ster. phrase at D.I,70 = e. g. A.II,104, 106, 210; Pug.44, 45, 50; Vism.19; VvA.6; DA.I,193 (ālokitaṁ purato pekkhanaṁ vil° anudisā p.). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālopa: {'def': '[ā + lup, cp. ālumpati; BSk. ālopa, e. g. Av. Ś I. 173, 341; Divy 290, 481] a piece (cut off), a bit (of food) morsel, esp. bits of food gathered by bhikkhus D.I,5 = A.V,206; III,176; A II 209; III,304; IV,318; Th.1, 1055; It.18; Pv.II,1⁷; Pug.58; Miln.231, 406; Vism.106; DA.I,80 (= vilopa-karaṇaṁ). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】一口（食物），一点点。 ālopika (在【合】中), 【形】一口的（食物）。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ālopati: {'def': '[ālopeti? ā + lopeti, Caus. of ālumpati] to break in, plunder, violate Th.1, 743. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālopika: {'def': '(adj.) [ālopa + ika] getting or having, or consisting of pieces (of food) A.I,295; II,206; Pug.55. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āloḷa: {'def': '[fr. ā + luḷ, cp. āluḷati & āloḷeti] confusion, uproar, agitation DhA.I,38. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】激动，混乱，喧嚣。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āloḷeti: {'def': '[Caus. of āluḷati, cp. āluḷeti] to confuse, mix, shake together, jumble S.I,175; J.II,272, 363; IV,333; VI,331; Vism.105. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + luḷ + e), 搞乱，混杂，混合。 āloḷesi, 【过】。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āloḷī: {'def': '(f.) [a + luḷ] that which is stirred up, mud, in cpd. sītāloḷī mud or loam from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin.I,206. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālu: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. ālu & °ka; cognate with Lat. ālum & alium, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under alium] a bulbous plant, Radix Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) J.IV,371 = VI,578; IV,373. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】可食用的树根或球茎，山药，洋芋。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āluka: {'def': '² (adj.) [etym.?] susceptiblé of, longing for, affected with (-°) Vin.I,288 (sīt°); DA.I,198 (id.); J.II,278 (taṇh° greedy). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ = ālu J.IV,46 (C. for ālupa). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālumpakāra: {'def': '[reading not sure, to ālumpati or ālopa] breaking off, falling off (?) or forming into bits(?) DhA.II,55 (°gūtha). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālumpati: {'def': '[ā + lup or lump, cp. ālopa] to pull out, break off M.I,324. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālupa: {'def': '(nt.) [etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests ālu-a › āluva › ālupa] = āluka the edible root of Amorphophallus Campanulatus J.IV,46 (= āluka-kaṇḍa C.).

the form āluva occurs at Ap 237. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āluḷa: {'def': '(adj. [fr. ā + lul] being in motion, confusion or agitation, disturbed, agitated J.VI,431. (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āluḷati: {'def': '[ā + lul; Sk. ālolati, cp. also P. āloḷeti] to move here & there, ppr. med. āluḷamāna agitated, whirling about DhA.IV,47 (T. ālūl°; v. l. āḷul°) confuse DhsA.375. Caus. āluḷeti to set in motion, agitate, confound J.II,9, 33. -- pp. āluḷita (q. v.). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āluḷeti: {'def': '(ā + luḷ + e), 搅动，使混淆。 āluḷesi, 【过】。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āluḷita: {'def': '[pp. of āluḷeti] agitated, confused J.II,101; Miln.397 (+ khalita). (Page 110)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ālāna: {'def': '& Āḷāna (nt.) [for ānāhana with substitution of l for n (cp. apilandhana for apinandh° and contraction of °āhana to °āna originally meaning “tying to” then the thing to which anything is tied] a peg, stake, post, esp. one to which an elephant is tied J.I,415; IV,308; DhA.I,126 (ḷ) where all MSS. have āḷāhana, perhaps correctly. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'āḷāna, 【中】树桩，（系象的）柱。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ālāpa: {'def': '【阳】 1. 谈话，交谈。 2. 词，话。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āma: {'def': '¹ (indecl.) [a specific Pāli formation representing either amma (q. v.) or a gradation of pron. base amu° “that” (see asu), thus deictic-emphatic exclam^n. Cp. also BSk. āma e. g. Av. Ś I.36] affirmative part. “yes, indeed, certainly” D.I,192 sq. (as v. l. BB.; T. has āmo); J.I,115, 226 (in C. expl^n. of T. amā-jāta which is to be read for āmajāta); II,92; V,448; Miln.11, 19, 253; DhA.I,10, 34; II,39, 44; VvA.69; PvA.12, 22, 56, 61, 75, 93 etc. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'āmaka, 【形】生的，新鲜的，未煮过的，未成熟的。 ~gandha, 【阳】讨厌的气味，肉。 ~kasusāna, 【中】停尸林，为了让野兽吃而丢弃尸体的场所。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Vedic āma = Gr. w]mόs, connected with Lat. amārus. The more common P. form is āmaka (q. v.)] raw, viz. (a) unbaked (of an earthen vessel), unfinished Sn.443; (b) uncooked (of flesh), nt. raw flesh, only in foll. cpds.: °gandha “smell of raw flesh”, verminous odour, a smell attributed in particular to rotting corpses (cp. similarly BSk. āmagandha M Vastu III,214) D.II,242 sq.; A.I,280; Sn.241, 242 (= vissagandha kuṇapagandha SnA 286), 248, 251; Dhs.625; and °giddha greedy after flesh (used as bait) J.VI,416 (= āmasaṅkhāta āmisa C.). (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】（表示答应的词：）是、唯〈书〉。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmaddana: {'def': '【中】压（轧）碎。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [ā + maddana of mṛd] crushing VvA.311. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmaka: {'def': '(adj.) [= āma²] raw, uncooked D.I,5 = Pug.58 (°maṁsa raw flesh); M.I,80 (titta-kalābu āmaka-cchinno).

--dhañña “raw” grain, corn in its natural, unprepared state D.I,5 = Pug.58 (see DA.I,78 for definition); Vin.IV,264; V,135. --sāka raw vegetables Vism.70. --susāna “cemetery of raw flesh” charnelgrove (cp. āmagandha under ama²), i. e. fetid smelling cremation ground J.I,264, 489; IV,45 sq.; VI,10; DhA.I,176; VvA.76; PvA.196. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmalaka: {'def': '【中】 āmalakī, 【阴】余甘子（见 Amatā）。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. āmalaka] emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin.I,201, 278; II,149 (°vaṇṭika pīthu); S.I,150; A.V,170; Sn.p. 125 (°matti); J.IV,363; V,380 (as v. l. for T. āmala); Miln.11; DhA.I,319; VvA.7. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmalakī: {'def': '(f.) āmalaka Vin.I,30; M.I,456 (°vana). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmanta: {'def': '(adj.-adv.) [either ger. of āmanteti (q. v.) or root der. fr. ā + mant, cp. āmantaṇā] asking or asked, invited, only as an° without being asked, unasked, uninvited Vin.I,254 (°cāra); A.III,259 (id.). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmantana: {'def': '【中】呼叫，邀请，称呼。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) & °nā (f., also °ṇā) [from āmanteti] addressing, calling; invitation, greeting Sn.40 (ep. Nd² 128); °vacana the address-form of speech i. e. the vocative case (cp. Sk. āmantritaṁ id.) SnA 435; KhA 167. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmantanaka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. āmantana] addressing, speaking to, conversing; f. °ikā interlocutor, companion, favourite queen Vv 18⁸ (= allāpa-sallāpa-yoggā kīḷanakāle vā tena (i. e. Sakkena) āmantetabbā VvA.96). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmantaṇīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of āmanteti] to be addressed J.IV,371. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmanteti: {'def': '(ā + mant + e), 呼叫，称呼，邀请。~esi,【过】。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[denom. of ā + *mantra] to call, address, speak to, invite, consult J.VI,265; DA.I,297; SnA 487 (= ālapati & avhayati); PvA.75, 80, 127. -- aor. āmantesi D.II,16; Sn.p. 78 (= ālapi SnA 394) & in poetry āmantayi Sn.997; Pv.II,2⁷; 3⁷ (perhaps better with v. l. SS samantayi). -- ger. āmanta (= Sk. *āmantrya) J.III,209, 315 (= āmantayitvāˊ C.), 329; IV,111; V,233; VI,511. ‹-› pp. āmantita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āmantāpeti to invite to come, to cause to be called, to send for D.I,134 (v. l. āmanteti); Miln.149. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmantita: {'def': '[pp. of āmanteti] addressed, called, invited Pv.II,3¹³ (= nimantita PvA.86). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmasana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. āmasati] touching, handling; touch Vin.IV,214. Cp. III,11⁸; Miln.127, 306; DA.I,78. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】触摸，摩擦。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmasati: {'def': '(ā + ma + a), 触，轻拍，擦。 āmasi, 【过】。 āmasita 和 āmaṭṭha, 【过分】。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + masati fr. mṛś] to touch (upon), to handle, to lay hold on Vin.II,221; III,48 (kumbhiṁ); J.III,319 (id.); A.V,263, 266; J.IV,67; Ps.II,209; Miln.306; SnA 400; DhsA.302; VvA.17. -- aor. āmasi J.II,360; ger. āmasitvā Vin.III,140 (udakapattaṁ) J.II,330; grd. āmassa J.II,360 (an°) and āmasitabba id. (C.). -- pp. āmaṭṭha & āmasita (q. v.). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmasita: {'def': '[pp. of āmasati] touched, taken hold of, occupied VvA.113 (an° khetta virgin land). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmata: {'def': 'in anāmata at J.II,56 is métric for amata. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmattika: {'def': '【中】陶器，瓦器。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmattikā: {'def': '(f.) [ā + mattikā] earthenware, crockery; in °āpaṇa a crockery shop, chandler’s shop Vin.IV,243. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmaya: {'def': '【阳】疾病。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[etym.? cp. Sk. āmaya] affliction, illness, misery; only as an° (adj.) not afflicted, not decaying, healthy, well (cp. BSk. nirāmaya Aśvaghoṣa II.9) Vin.I,294; Vv 15¹⁰ (= aroga VvA.74); 17⁷; 36⁸; J.III,260, 528; IV, 427; VI,23. Positive only very late, e. g. Sdhp.397. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmaṇḍaliya: {'def': '[ā + maṇḍala + iya] a formation resembling a circle, in phrase °ṁ karoti to form a ring (of people) or a circle, to stand closely together M I 225 (cp. Sk. āmaṇḍalikaroti). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmaṭṭha: {'def': '(āmasati 的【过分】), 已接触，已触摸。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. āmṛṣṭa, pp. of āmasati; cp. āmasita] touched, handled J.I,98 (an°); DA.I,107 (= parāmaṭṭha); Sdhp.333. (Page 103)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmeṇḍita: {'def': '【中】惊呼。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(or Āmeḍita) [Sk. āmreḍita fram ā + mreḍ, dialectical] -- (nt.) sympathy in °ṁ karoti to show sympathy (? so Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 106) DA.I,228 = SnA 155 (v. l. at DA. āmeḍita). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmilāka: {'def': '(nt.?) [etym.?] a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DA.I,87. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmisa: {'def': '【中】食物，肉，饵，利益，【形】材料。 ~dāna, 【中】布施必需品（即：食物，居所，等）。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [der. fr. āma raw, q. v. for etym. -- Vedic āmis (m.); later Sk. āmiṣa (nt.), both in lit. & fig. meaning] ‹-› 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of “raw, unprepared, uncultivated”; thus °khāra raw lye Vin.I, 206. -- 2. “fleshy, of the flesh” (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material, physical; generally in opposition to dhamma (see dhamma B 1. a. and also next no.), thus at M.I,12 (°dāyāda); It.101 (id.); A.I,91 = It.98 (°dāna material gifts opp. to spiritual ones); Dhs.1344 (°paṭisanthāra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs.trsl. 350). -- 3. food, esp. palatable food (cp. E. sweetmeat); food for enjoyment, dainties Vin.II,269 sq.; J.II,6; Miln.413 (lok°); DA.I,83 (°sannidhi), -- 4. bait S.I,67; IV,158; J.IV,57, 219; VI,416; DA.I,270. -- 5. gain, reward, money, douceur, gratuity, “tip” PvA.36, 46; esp. in phrase °kiñcikkha-hetu for the sake of some (little) gain S.II,234; A.I,128; V,265, 283 sq., 293 sq.; Pug.29; Pv.II,8³ (= kiñci āmisaṁ patthento PvA.107); Miln.93; VvA.241 (= bhogahetu). -- 6. enjoyment Pv.II,8² (= kāmāmise-laggacitto PvA.107). -- 7. greed, desire, lust Vin.I,303 (°antara out of greed, selfish, opp. mettacitto); A.III,144 (id.), 184 (id.); I,73 (°garū parisā); J.V,91 (°cakkhu); Ps.II,238 (mār°). See also cpds. with nir° and sa°. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmo: {'def': '= āma D.I,192, 3. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 āma。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmoda: {'def': '[Sk. āmoda, fr. ā + mud] that which pleases; fragrance, perfume Dāvs.V,51. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 快乐。 2. 强烈的芬芳。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmodamāna: {'def': '(adj.) [ppr. med. of āmodeti] rejoicing, glad S.I,100 (v. l. anu°) = It.66; Vv 64⁸ (= pamodamāna VvA.278); J.V,45. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【现分】高兴的，欢喜的。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmodanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. ā + mud] rejoicing Dhs.86, 285. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】欣喜，高兴。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmodati: {'def': '(ā + mud + a) 欢喜。 āmodi, 【过】。 āmodita, 【过分】。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmodeti: {'def': '【使】(ā + mud + e), 喜悦。 āmodesi, 【过】。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. āmodayati, Caus. of ā + mud] to please, gladden, satisfy Th.1, 649 (cittaṁ); J.V,34. -- pp. āmodita (q. v.). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmodita: {'def': '[pp. fr. āmodeti] pleased, satisfied, glad J.I,17 (V.80); V,45 (°pamodita highly pleased); Miln.346. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmutta: {'def': '[Sk. āmukta, pp. of ā + muc, cp. also BSk. āmukta jewel Divy 2, 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later Pāli passages, e. g. at PvA.134. Semantically cp. ābharaṇa] having put on, clothed in, dressed with, adorned with (always °-) D.I,104 (°mālābharaṇa); Vin.II,156 = Vv 20⁸ (°maṇi-kuṇḍala); S.I,211; J.IV,460; V, 155; VI,492; Vv 72¹ (= paṭimukka); 80² (°hatthābharaṇa); Pv.II,9⁵¹ (°maṇikuṇḍala);J.IV,183; VvA.182. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmuñcati: {'def': '[ā + muc] to put on, take up; to be attached to, cling to DhsA.305. -- pp. āmutta (q. v.). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + muc + ŋ-a), 穿上（服装），穿着。 āmuñci, 【过】。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmā: {'def': '【阴】女奴隶。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āmāsaya: {'def': '【阳】胃。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[āma² + āsaya, cp. Sk. āmāśaya & āmāśraya] receptacle of undigested food, i. e. the stomach Vism.260; KhA 59. Opp. pakkāsaya. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āmāya: {'def': '(adj.) [to be considered either a der. from amā (see amājāta in same meaning) or to be spelt amāya which metri causa may be written ā°] “born in the house” (cp. semantically Gr. i)qagenήs › indigenous), inborn, being by birth, in cpd. °dāsa (dāsī) a born slave, a slave by birth J.VI,117 (= gehadāsiyā kucchismiṁ jātadasī C.), 285 (= dāsassa dāsiyā kucchimhi jātadāsā). (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āna: {'def': 'āṇa, 【中】呼吸，吸入。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ānadati: {'def': '[ā + nadati] to trumpet (of elephants) J.IV,233. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānaka: {'def': '[Sk. ānaka, cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 10] a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end S.II,266; J.II,344; Dpvs XVI,14. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】半球形铜鼓。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ānana: {'def': '【中】面，嘴。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic āna, later Sk. ānana from an to breathe] the mouth; adj. (-°) having a mouth Sdhp.103; Pgdp 63 (vikaṭ°). (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānanda: {'def': '[Vedic ānanda, fr. ā + nand, cp. BSk. ānandī joy Divy 37] joy, pleasure, bliss, delight D.I,3; Sn.679, 687; J.I,207 (°maccha Leviathan); VI,589 (°bheri festive drum); DA.I,53 (= pītiyā etaṁ adhivacanaṁ). (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】欢乐，快乐。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '（比库名）阿难达，（古音译：）阿难陀，阿难', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Ānandati: {'def': '[ā + nandati] to be pleased or delighted J.VI,589 (aor. ānandi in T. reading ānandi vittā, expl^d. by C. as nandittha was pleased; we should however read ānandi-cittā with gladdened heart). See also ānandiya. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānandin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ā + nand] joyful, friendly Th.1, 555; J.IV,226. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānandiya: {'def': '(adj.-.) [grd. of ānandati] enjoyable, nt. joy, feast J.VI,589 (°ṁ acarati to celebrate the feast = ānandachaṇa C.). (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānandī: {'def': '(f.) [ā + nandī, cp. ānanda] joy, happiness in cpd. ānandi-citta J.VI,589 (so read probably for ānandi vitta: see ānandati). (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】欢喜的。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ānantarika: {'def': '(& °ya) [fr. an + antara + ika] without an interval, immediately following, successive Vin.I,321; II, 212; Pug.13; Dhs.1291.

--kamma “conduct that finds retribution without delay” (Kvu trsl. 275 n. 2) Vin.II,193; J.I,45; Kvu 480; Miln.25 (cp. Dhs.trsl. 267); Vism.177 (as prohibiting practice of kammaṭṭhāna). (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】下一个。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ānaya: {'def': '(adj.) [ā + naya] to be brought, in suvānaya easy to bring S.I,124 = J.I,80. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānayati: {'def': '参考 āneti。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see āneti. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānañca: {'def': 'see ākāsa° and viññāṇa°. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānañja: {'def': 'see ānejja. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānaṇya: {'def': '【中】没有债务。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. ānṛṇya, so also BSk. e. g. Jtm 31¹⁸; from a + ṛṇa, P. iṇa but also aṇa in composition, thus an-aṇa as base of ānaṇya] freedom from debt D.I,73; A.III,354 (Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. anaṇa); Nd¹ 160; Vism.44; DA.I,3. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānejja: {'def': 'and Ānañja [abstr. fr. an + *añja or *ejja = *ijja. The Sanskritised equivalent would be *iñjya or *iñgya of ing to stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *aṅg in Pāli, referring it to a base with ṛ (probably Sk. ṛj, ṛñjati) in analogy to a form like Sk. ṛṇa = Pāli aṇa & iṇa, both a & i representing Sk. ṛ. The form añja would thus correspond to a Sk. *añjya (*añgya). The third P. form ān-eñja is a direct (later, and probably re-instituted) formation from Sk. iñjya, which in an interesting way became in BSk. re-sanskritised to āñijya (which on the other hand may represent āñejja & thus give the latter the feature of a later, but more specifically Pāli form). The editions of P. Texts show a great variance of spelling, based on MSS. vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation] immovability, imperturbability, impassibility. The word is n. but occurs as adj. at Vin.III,109 (ānañja samādhi, with which cp. BSk. ānijyā śāntiḥ at Av. Ś I.199. -- The term usually occurs in cpd. ānejja-ppatta (adj.) immovable lit. having attained impassibility, expl^d. by Bdhgh. at Vin.III,267 (on Pār. I.1, 6) as acala, niccala, i. e. motionless. This cpd. is indicated below by (p.) after the reference. -- The various spellings of the word are as follows: -- 1. ānejja D.I,76 (v. l. ānañja-p.) A.II,184 (p.); III,93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq. (p.); Nd² 471 (v. l. aneja, ānañja) = Vbh.137 (āneñja); Nd² 569^a (v. l. ānañja), 601 (v. l. anejja & aneñja); Pug.60 (p.); DA.I,219 (v. l. BB āneñja). -- 2. ānañja Vin.III,4 (p.) (v. l. ānañca°, anañja°, ānañja°; Bdhgh. ānejja° p. 267), 109; Ud.27 (samādhi, adj. v. l. ānañca); DhA.IV,46. See also below cpd. °kāraṇa. -- A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is āṇañja at M.II,229 (v. l. aṇañja, aneñja, āneñja), 253, 254. -- 3. āneñja S.II,82. (v. l. āṇañje, or is it āṇeñja?); D.III,217 (°âbhisaṅkhāra of imperturbable character, remaining static, cp. Kvu trsl. 358); Nd¹ 90 (id.), 206, 442; Ps.II,206; Vbh.135, 340; Vism.377 (p.), 386 (sixteen° fold), 571; Nett 87, 99. ‹-› See also iñjati.

--kāraṇa trick of immovability, i. e. pretending to be dead (done by an elephant, but see differently Morris J P T S. 1886, 154) J.I,415; II,325 (v. l. āṇañja, āneñca, ānañca); IV,308; V,273, 310. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āneti: {'def': '[ā + neti] to bring, to bring towards, to fetch, procure, convey, bring back Sn.110; PvA.54, 92. pot. 1^st pl. ānema (or imper. 2^nd pl ānetha M.I,371. fut. ānayissati S.I,124; Pv.II,6⁵; J.III,173; V,154 (v. l.), & ānessati J.V,154. inf. ānayituṁ Pv II 6¹⁰, ger. ānetvā PvA.42, 74. aor. ānesi PvA.3, & ānayi Pv.I,7⁷ (sapatiṁ). -- pp. ānīta (q. v.). -- Med. pass. ānīyati & āniyyati D.II,245 (āniyyataṁ imper. shall be brought); M.I,371 (ppr. ānīyamāna). -- Caus. II. ānāpeti to cause to be fetched J.III,391; V,225. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + ni + a) 带来，接来。 ānetabba, 【潜】。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āneñja: {'def': '【形】静态的，沈着的。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āneñjatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. āneñja] steadfastness Vism.330, 386. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānisada: {'def': '【中】臀部。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [a + sad] “sit down”, bottom, behind M.I,80 = 245; J.III,435 (gloss asata) Vism.251 = KhA 45 (°ttaca), 252 (°maṁsa). (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānisaŋsa: {'def': '【阳】利润，功绩，好的结果。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ānisaṁsa: {'def': '[ā + ni + saṁsa, BSk. distorted to anuśaṁsa] praise i. e. that which is commendable, profit, merit, advantage, good result, blessing in or from (c. Loc.). ‹-› There are five ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīla-sampadāya or blessings which accrue to the virtuous enum^d. at D.II,86, viz. bhogakkhandha great wealth, kittisadda good report, visārada self-confidence, asammūlho kālaṁ karoti an untroubled death, saggaṁ lokaṁ uppajjati a happy state after death. -- D.I,110, 143; III,132 (four), 236 (five); M.I,204; S.I,46, 52; III,8, 93 (mahā°); V,69 (seven), 73, 129, 133, 237 (seven), 267, 276; A.I,58 (karaṇīye kariyamāne); II,26, 185, 239, 243 (sikkhā°); III,41 (dāne), 248 (dhammasavane), 250 (yāguyā), 251 (upaṭṭhita-satissa), 253 sq. (sīlavato sīlasampadāya etc., as above), 267 (sucarite), 441; IV,150 (mettāya ceto-vimuttiyā), 361 (dhammasavane), 439 sq. (nekkhamme avitakke nippītike), 442, 443 sq. (ākās’ānañcāyatane); V,I, 106 (mahā°), 311; It.28, 29, 40 (sikkhā°); Sn.256 (phala°), 784, 952; J.I,9, 94; V,491 (v. l. anu°); Nd¹ 73, 104, 441; Kvu 400; Miln.198; VvA.6, 113; PvA.9 (dāna°) 12, 64 (= phala), 208, 221 (= guṇa); Sdhp.263. -- Eleven ānisaṁsas of mettā (cp. Ps.II,130) are given in detail at Vism.311‹-› 314; on another eight see pp. 644 sq. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānubhāva: {'def': '[the dissociated composition form of anubhāva, q. v. for details. Only in later language] greatness, magnificence, majesty, splendour J.I,69 (mahanto); II,102 (of a jewel) V.491; DhA.II,58. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】力量，辉煌，最高权威。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ānupubba: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. anupubba] rule, regularity, order Th.1, 727 (cp. M Vastu II.224 ānupubbā). (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānupubbatā: {'def': '(f.) (or °ta nt.?) [fr. last] succession; only in tt. g. padânu-pubbatā word sequence, in expl^n. of iti Nd¹ 140; Nd² 137 (v. l. °ka). (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānupubbikathā: {'def': '[for anupubbi° representing its isolated composition form, cp. ānubhāva & see also anupubbi°] regulated exposition, graduated sermon D.I,110; II,41 sq.; M.I,379; J.I,8; Miln.228; DA.I,277, 308; DhA.IV,199. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānupubbī: {'def': '【阴】次序，连续。 ~kathā, 【阴】毕业的训诫。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ānupuṭṭha: {'def': 'metri causa for anupuṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānuttariya: {'def': '(nt.) [see also anuttariya which as --° probably represents ānutt°] incomparableness, excellency, supreme ideal D.III,102 sq.; A.V,37. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānāmeti: {'def': '[ā + nāmeti, Caus. of namati, which is usually spelt nameti] to make bend, to bend, to bring toward or under J.V,154 (doubtful reading fut ānāmayissasi, v. l. ānayissati, C. ānessasi = lead to). (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānāpeti: {'def': 'see āneti. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānāpāna: {'def': '(nt.) [āna + apāna, cpds. of an to breathe] in haled & exhaled breath, inspiration & respiration S.V,132, 311 sq.; J.I,58; Ps.I,162 (°kathā); usually in cpd. °sati concentration by in-breathing & out-breathing (cp. Man. of Mystic 70) M.I,425 (cp. D.II,291); III,82; Vin.III,70; A.I,30; It.80; Ps.I,166, 172, 185 (°samādhi); Nd² 466 B (id.); Miln.332; Vism.111, 197, 266 sq.; SnA 165. See detail under sati. (Page 100)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '或 āṇāpāṇa, 【中】吸入和呼气，呼吸。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ānāpānasati: {'def': '安那般那念,安般念, 出入息念(PS:原巴利语之意为--入出息念)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Ānīta: {'def': '(āneti 的【过分】), 已带来。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of ānetī] fetched, brought (here), brought back adduced J.I,291; III,127; IV,1. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ānīyamāna: {'def': '【现被分】被接来，被带来。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpa: {'def': '【阳，中】水，液体 (【合】中变成 āpo) 。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Āpo (nt.) [Vedic ap & āp, f. sg. apā, pl. āpaḥ, later Sk. also āpaḥ nt. -- Idg. *ap & *ab, primarily to Lith. ùpé water, Old Prussian ape river, Gr. *)lpi/a N. of the Peloponnesus; further (as *ab) to Lat. amnis river, Sk. abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water] water; philosophically t. t. for cohesion, representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahābhūta), viz. paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo: see Cpd. 268 & Dhs.trsl. 201, also below °dhātu. ‹-› D.II,259; M.I,327; S.II,103; III,54, 207; A.IV,312, 375; Sn.307, 391 (°ṁ), 392 (Loc. āpe), 437 (id.); J.IV,8 (paṭhavi-āpa-teja°); Dhs.652; Miln.363 (Gen. āpassa, with paṭhavī etc.); Sdhp.100.

--kasiṇa the water-device, i. e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 n.) D.III,268; J.I,313; Dhs.203; Vism.170; DhA I 312; III,214. --dhātu the fluid element, the essential element in water, i. e element of cohesion (see Cpd. 155 n. 2; Mystic 9 n. 2; Dhs.trsl. 201, 242) D.III,228, 247; M.I,187, 422: Dhs.652; Nett 74. See also dhātu. --rasa the taste of water A.I,32; SnA 6. --sama resembling water M.I,423. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpadā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. āpad, fr. ā + pad, cp. āpajjati & BSk. āpad, e. g. in āpadgata Jtm 31³³] accident, misfortune, distress, D.III,190; A.II,68 (Loc. pl. āpadāsu), 187; III, 45; IV,31; Th.1, 371; J.IV,163 (āpadatthā, a difficult form; vv. ll. T. aparattā, āpadatvā, C. aparatthā; expl^d. by āpadāya); V,340 (Loc. āpade), 368; PvA.130 (quot.); Sdhp.312, 554. Note. For the contracted form in Loc. pl. āpāsu (= *āpatsu) see *āpā. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】不幸，苦恼。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpagā: {'def': '【阴】河。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [āpa + ga of gam] a river Th.1, 309; Sn.319; J.V,454; Dāvs.I,32; VvA.41. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpajjati: {'def': '(ā + pad + ya), 进入，遭受，偶遇。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. āpadyate, ā + pad] to get into, to meet with (Acc.); to undergo; to make, produce, exhibit Vin.II,126 (saṁvaraṁ); D.I,222 (pariyeṭṭhiṁ); It.113 (vuddhiṁ); J.I,73; Pug.20, 33 (diṭṭh’ânugatiṁ); PvA.29 (ppr. āpajjanto); DhA.II,71 -- pot. āpajjeyya D.I,119 (musāvādaṁ). -- aor. āpajji J.V,349; PvA.124 (saṅkocaṁ) & āpādi S.I,37; A.II,34; It.85; J.II,293; 3^rd pl. āpādu D.II,273. -- ger. āpajjitva PvA.22 (saṁvegaṁ), 151. ‹-› pp. āpanna (q. v.). -- Caus. āpādeti (q. v.). -- Note. The reading āpajja in āpajja naṁ It.86 is uncertain (vv. ll. āsajja & ālajja). The id. p. at Vin.II,203 (CV. VII.4, 8) has āsajjanaṁ, for which Bdhgh, on p. 325 has āpajjanaṁ. Cp. pariyāpajjati. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpakā: {'def': '(f.) [= āpagā] river J.V,452; VI,518. (Page 101)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpanna: {'def': '(āpajjati 的【过分】), 着手过，跌入过。 ~sattā, 【阴】孕妇。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of āpajjati] -- 1. entered upon, fallen into, possessed of, having done Vin.I,164 (āpattiṁ ā.); III,90; D.I,4 (dayāpanna merciful); Nd² 32 (taṇhāya). -- 2. unfortunate, miserable J.I,19 (V.124). Cp. pari°. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpatacchika: {'def': 'at J.VI,17 is C. reading for apatacchika in khārâpat° (q. v.). (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpatana: {'def': '【中】跌倒。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpatati: {'def': '[ā + patati] to fall on to, to rush on to J.V,349 (= upadhāvati C.); VI,451 (= āgacchati C.); Miln.371. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + pat + a), 落下，冲闯。 āpati, 【过】。 āpatita, 【过分】。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpatha: {'def': 'in micchāpatha, dvedhāpatha as classified in Vbh.Ind. p. 441 should be grouped under patha as micchā°, dvedhā°. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpathaka: {'def': 'in °jjhāyin Nd² 342² is read āpādaka° at Nd¹ 226, and āpātaka° at Vism.26. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpatti: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. āpatti, fr. ā + pad, cp. apajjati & BSk. āpatti, e. g, Divy 330] an ecclesiastical offence (cp. Kvu trsl. 362 n. 1), Vin.I,103 (°khandha), 164 (°ṁ paṭikaroti), 322 (°ṁ passati), 354 (avasesā & anavasesā); II,2 sq. (°ṁ ropeti), 59, 60 (°pariyanta), 88 (°adhikaraṇa), 259 (°ṁ paṭikaroti); IV,344; D.III,212 (°kusalatā); A.I,84 (id.), 87; II,240 (°bhaya); Dhs.1330 sq. (cp. Dhs.trsl. 346). ‹-› anāpatti Vin.III,35.

°vuṭṭhānatā forgiveness of an offence Vin.II,250 (put before anāpatti). (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】进入，宗教的罪过，修行上的违犯。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpattika: {'def': '(adj.) [āpatti + ka, cp. BSk. āpattika Divy 303] guilty of an offence M.I,443; Vin.IV,224. an° Vin.I,127. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpaṇa: {'def': '【阳】市集，市场。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. āpaṇa, ā + paṇ] a bazaar, shop Vin.I,140; J.I,55; V,445; Pv.II,3²²; Miln.2, 341; SnA 440; DhA.I,317; II,89; VvA.157; PvA.88, 333 (phal° fruit shop), 215. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpaṇika: {'def': '[fr. āpaṇa] a shopkeeper, tradesman J.I,124; Miln.344; VvA.157; DhA.II,89. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】零售商，店主。(p52)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of āp, see appoti & pāpuṇāti] to cause to reach or obtain J.VI,46. Cp. vy°. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āphusati: {'def': '[ā + phusati] to feel, realise, attain to, reach; aor. āphusi Vv 16⁹ (= adhigacchi VvA.84). (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a + phus + a), 感触，达到。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpiyati: {'def': '[fr. ṛ, cp. appāyati & appeti] to be in motion (in etym. of āpo) Vism.364. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpodhātu: {'def': '【阴】水元素。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpucchati: {'def': '[ā + pucchati] to enquire after, look for, ask, esp. to ask permission or leave; aor. āpucchi J.I,140; PvA.110; grd. āpucchitabba DhA.I,6; ger. āpucchitvā Vin.IV,267 (apaloketvā +); Miln.29; PvA.111; āpucchitūna (cp. Geiger § 211) Th.2, 426; āpuccha Th.2, 416, & āpucchā [= āpṛcchya, cp. Vedic ācyā for ācya], only in neg. form an° without asking Vin.II,211, 219; IV,165, 226 (= anapaloketvā); DhA.I,81. -- pp. āpucchita Vin.IV,272. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + pucch + a), 问，询问，请允许。 āpucchi, 【过】。 āpucchita,【过分】。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpucchitabba: {'def': '【潜】应该询问。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpādaka: {'def': '【阳】照顾孩子的人，监护人。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. ā + pad] -- 1. (adj.) producing, leading to (-°) VvA.4 (abhiññ° catuttha-jjhāna). -- 2. (n.) one who takes care of a child, a protector, guardian A.I,62 = 132 = It.110 (+ posaka). -- f. āpādikā a nurse, foster-mother Vin.II,289 (+ posikā). (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpādeti: {'def': '[Caus. of āpajjati] to produce, make out, bring, bring into M.I,78; III,248; S.IV,110 (addhānaṁ to live one’s life, cp. addhānaṁ āpādi J.II,293 = jīvit’addhānaṁ āpādi āyuṁ vindi C.); SnA 466. -- Cp. pari° (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a + pad + e), 看护，生产。 āpādesi, 【过】。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpādetu: {'def': '【阳】抚养（孩子）的人。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpādi: {'def': '(āpajjati 的【过】)。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'aor. of āpajjati (q. v.). (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpādikā: {'def': '【阴】护士，养母。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpādā: {'def': '(f.) [short for āpādikā] a nursing woman, in an° not nursing, unmarried J.IV,178. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpāna: {'def': '【中】饮料，宴会。 ~bhūmi, 【阴】 ~maṇḍala, 【中】宴会厅。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ā + pā] drinking; drinking party, banquet; banqueting-hall, drinking-hall J.I,52 (°maṇḍala); V,292 (°bhūmi); Vism.399 (id.); DhA.I,213 (id., rañño). (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpānaka: {'def': '(adj.) [āpāna + ka] drinking, one who is in the habit of drinking D.I,167. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpānīya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āpāna, ā + pā] drinkable, fit for drinking or drinking with, in °kaṁsa drinking-bowl, goblet M.I,316; S.II,110. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpānīyakaŋsa: {'def': '【阳】高脚玻璃杯，酒杯，盛饮料的碗，盛饮料的容器。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpātha: {'def': '[etym.? Trenckner, Miln.p. 428 says: “I suspect ā. to be corrupted from āpāta (cp. āpatati), under an impression that it is allied to patha; but it is scarcely ever written so”] sphere, range, focus, field (of consciousness or perception; cp. Dhs.trsl. 199), appearance A.II,67; J.I,336; Vbh.321; Miln.298; Vism.21, 548; DA.I,228; DhsA.308, 333; VvA.232 (°kāla); DhA.IV,85; Sdhp.356. Usually in phrase āpāthaṁ gacchati to come into focus, to become clear, to appear M.I,190; S.IV,160, or °ṁ āgacchati Vin.I,184; A.III,377 sq.; IV,404; Vism.125. Cp. °gata below.

--gata come into the sphere of, appearing, visible M.I,174 = Nd² jhāna (an° unapproached); PvA.23 (āpāthaṁ gata). --gatatta abstr. fr. last: appcarance Vism.617. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】（感觉器官的）范围。 ~gata, 【形】进入范围的。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpāthaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āpātha] belonging to the (perceptual) sphere of, visible, in °nisādin lying down visible D.III,44, 47. Cp. āpathaka. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āpāyika: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. apāya] one suffering in an apāya or state of misery after death Vin.II,202 = It.85 (v. l. ap°); Vin.II,205; D.I,103; A.I,265; It.42; Vism.16; PvA.60. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】出生在恶道的，属于恶道的。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpāṇa: {'def': '[ā + pāṇa] life, lit. breathing, only in cpd. °koṭi the end of life Miln.397; Dāvs III,93; adj. --koṭika M.II,120; Vism.10. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】呼吸，呼出。 ~koṭika, 【形】命终的。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpūrati: {'def': '[a + pūrati] to be filled, to become full, to increase J.III,154 (cando ā. = pūrati C.); IV,26, 99, 100. (Page 102)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a + pūr + a), 充满，增加。 āpūri, 【过】。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āpūraṇa: {'def': '【中】充填，充满。(p53)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āra: {'def': '【阳】针。 ~gga, 【中】针或锥子的尖端。 ~patha, 【阳】针路径。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārabbha: {'def': '【无】首先，谈到，大约。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [ger. of ārabhati² in abs. function; cp. Sk. ārabhya meaning since, from] -- 1. beginning, under‹-› taking etc., in cpd. °vatthu occasion for making an effort, concern, duty, obligation D.III,256 = A.IV,334 (eight such occasions enum^d). -- 2. (prep. with Acc.) lit. beginning with, taking (into consideration), referring to, concerning, with reference to, about D.I,180; A.II,27 = It.103 (senāsanaṁ ā.); Sn.972 (upekhaṁ; v. l. ārambha; C. uppādetvā); Pv.I,4¹ (pubbe pete ā.); DhA.I,3; II,37; PvA.3 (seṭṭhiputta-petaṁ ā.), 16, and passim. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārabhana: {'def': '【中】出发，开始。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārabhati: {'def': '¹ [not with Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 202 fr. rabh and identical with ārabhati², but with Kern, Toev. s. v. identical with Sk. ālabhate, ā + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirārambha] to kill, destroy M.I,371 (pāṇaṁ). (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a + rabh + a), 1. 开始。 2. 杀，折磨。 ārabhi, 【过】。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² & Ārabbhati [ā + rabhati, Sk. ārabhati & ārambhati, ā + rabh] to begin, start, undertake, attempt S.I,156 (ārabbhatha “bestir yourselves”) = Miln.245 = Th.1, 256 (bh.); Pug.64 (bh.); viriyaṁ ārabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself (cp. ārambha) A.IV,334. ‹-› aor. ārabhi DhA.II,38 & ārabbhi PvA.35. -- ger. ārabbha, see sep. -- pp. āraddha (q. v.). (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āracayāracayā: {'def': '[ā + racayā a ger. or Abl. form. fr. ā + *rac, in usual Sk. meaning “to produce”, but here as a sound-root for slashing noise, in reduplication for sake of intensification. Altogether problematic] by means of hammering, slashing or beating (like beating a hide) Sn.673 (gloss ārajayārajayā fr. ā + *rañj or *raj). -- SnA 481 expl^ns. the passage as follows: ārajayārajayā; i. e. yathā manussā allacammaṁ bhūmiyaṁ pattharitvā khīlehi ākoṭenti, evaṁ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāḷetvā ekam ekaṁ koṭiṁ chinditvā vihananti, chinnachinnakoṭi punappuna samuṭṭhāti; āracayāracayā ti pi pāṭho, āviñjitvā (v. l. BB. āvijjhitvā) āviñjitvā ti attho. -- Cp. ārañjita. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āraddha: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of ā + rabh] begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm A.I,148 (āraddhaṁ me viriyaṁ It.30; PvA.73 (ṭhapetuṁ began to place), 212 (gantuṁ). Cp. ārādhaka 1.

--citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled D.I,176; M.I,414; S.II,21; Sn.p. 102; SnA 436. Cp. ārādheti 1. --viriya (adj.) strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin.I,182; D.III,252, 268, 282, 285; A.I,24; Sn.68, 344; It.71 (opp. hīna-viriya); Nd² 131; Ps.I,171; ThA.95. Cp. viriyārambha; f. abstr. °viriyatā M.I,19. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ārabhati 的【过分】), 已开始，已变坚实。 ~citta, 【形】嬴得好意。~viriya, 【形】奋发的。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āraddhā: {'def': '(ārabhati 的【独】), 开始了。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āragga: {'def': '(nt.) [ārā + agga; Sk. ārāgra of ārā an awl, a prick] the point of an awl, the head of certain arrows, having the shape of an awl, or an arrow of that kind (see Halayudha p. 151) A.I,65; Sn.625, 631; Dh.401, 407; Vism.306; DhA II 51; IV,181. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āraha: {'def': '(adj.) metri causa for araha deserving J.VI,164. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nt.) only in pl. gihīnaṁ ārahāni, things proper to laymen, D.III,163. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārakatta: {'def': '【中】被远离的境界。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [*ārakāt + tvaṁ] warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. Gen.); occurring only in pop. etym. of arahant at A.IV,145; DhA.IV,228; DA.I,146 = VvA.105, 106 = PvA.7; cp. DhsA.349. (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārakkha: {'def': '[ā + rakkha] watch, guard, protection, care D.II,59; III,289; S.IV,97, 175, 195; A.II,120; III,38; IV, 266, 270, 281 (°sampadā), 322 (id.), 400; V,29 sq.; J.I,203; II,326; IV,29 (°purisa); V,212 (°ṭṭhāna, i. e. harem), 374 (°parivāra); Pug.21 (an°), 24; Miln.154; Vism.19 (°gocara preventive behaviour, cautiousness); SnA 476 (°devatā); KhA 120 (id.), 169; DhA.II,146; PvA.195; Sdhp.357, 365. (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārakkhaka: {'def': '【阳】守卫，保护者，巡夜者，看守人。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārakkheyya: {'def': 'see arakkheyya. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārakkhlka: {'def': '[fr. ārakkha] a guard, watchman J.IV,29. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārakkhā: {'def': '【阴】 1. 保护。 2. 照料，看守。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārakā: {'def': '【无】远离，在远处的。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Sk. ārāt & ārakāt, Abl. form. fr. *āraka, see ārā²] far off, far from, away from, also used as prep. c. Abl. and as adj. pl. keeping away from, removed, far Vin.II,239 = A.IV,202 (saṅghamhā); D.I,99, 102 (adj.) 167; M.I,280 (adj.) S.II,99; IV,43 sq.; A.I,281; It.91; J.I,272; III,525; V,451; Miln.243; VvA.72, 73 (adj. + viratā). (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārakūṭa: {'def': '【阳】黄铜。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārambha: {'def': '【阳】 1. 开始。 2. 尝试。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. ārambha in meaning “beginning”, fr ā + rabh (rambh) cp. ārabhati] -- 1. attempt, effort, inception of energy (cp. Dhs.trsl. 15 & K. S. p. 318 giving C. def. as kicca, karaṇīya, attha, i. e. 1. undertaking & duty, 2. object) S.I,76 (mah°); V,66, 104 sq. (°dhātu); III,338 (id.), 166 (°ja; T. arabbhaja, v. l. ārambhaja to be preferred) = Pug.64; Miln.244; Net 41; DhsA.145. --viriyārambha (cp. āraddha-viriya) zeal, resolution, energy Vin.II,197; S.IV,175; A.I,12, 16. -- 2. support, ground, object, thing Nett 70 sq., 107; an° unsupported, independent Sn.743 (= nibbāna SnA 507). Cp. also nirambha, upārambha, sārambha. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārammaṇa: {'def': '所缘,对象(ps:ārammaṇa paccaya 所缘缘)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【中】感官的对象。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. ālambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh (see rabhati)] primary meaning “foundation”, from this applied in the foll. senses: (1) support, help, footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means of achieving what is desired, i. e. basis of operation, chance Sn.1069 (= ālambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd² 132); Pv.I,4¹ (yaṁ kiñc’ārammaṇaṁ katvā); ārammaṇaṁ labhati (+ otāraṁ labhati) to get the chance S.II,268; IV,185. -- (2) condition, ground, cause, means, esp. a cause of desire or clinging to life, pl. °ā causes of rebirth (interpreted by taṇhā at Nd¹ 429), lust Sn.474 (= paccayā SnA 410), 945 (= Nd¹ 429); KhA 23; DhA.I,288 (sappāy°); PvA.279. -- (3) a basis for the working of the mind & intellect; i. e. sense-object, object of thought or consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of “relation” it is closely connected with āyatana (see āyatana³), so that it sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Cpd. 3 distinguishes a 5 fold object, viz. citta, cetasika, pasāda- & sukhuma-rūpa, paññatti, nibbāna. See on term especially Cpd. 3, 14; Dhs.trsl. XLI. & 209. -- A 1. sq.; IV,385; Sn.506; Ps.I,57 sq., 84 (four ā.); II,97, 118, 143; Dhs.1 (dhamm° object of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim; Vbh.12, 79, 92, 319, 332 (four); Nett 191 (six); Vism.87 sq., 375 (°saṅkantika), 430 sq. (in var. sets with ref. to var. objects), 533; DhsA.48, 127; VvA.11, 38. -- rūpārammaṇa lit. dependence on form, i. e. object of sight, visible form, especially striking appearance, visibility, sight D.III,228; S.III,53; A.I,82; J.I,304; II,439, 442; PvA.265. ‹-› ārammaṇaṁ karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one’s concern (cp. Pv.I,4¹, above 1). -- ārammaṇa-kusala clever in the objects (of meditation) S.III,266; ā°-paccayatā relation of presentation (i. e. of subj. & obj.) Nett 80. -- (4) (-°) (adj.) being supported by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon PvA.8 (nissay°), 98 (ek°); VvA.119 (buddh° pīti rapture centred in the Buddha). (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārata: {'def': '[Sk. ārata, pp. of ā + ram, cp. ārati] leaving off, keeping away from, abstaining J.IV,372 (= virata); Nd² 591 (+ virata paṭivirata). (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(āramati 的【过分】), 已远离，已自制。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārati: {'def': '【阴】节制，停止。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. ārati, ā + ram] leaving off, abstinence Vv 63⁹ (= paṭivirati VvA.263); in exegetical style occurring in typ. comb^n. with virati paṭivirati veramaṇī, e. g. at Nd² 462; Dhs.299. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āratta: {'def': '(nt.?) [Sk. cp. ārakta, pp. of ā + raj] time, period (orig. affected, tinted with), only in cpd. vassāratta the rainy season, lent J.IV,444; Dāvs II.74. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārañjita: {'def': '【过分】已犁，已砍伤，已擦。【中】疤痕。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[in form = Sk. *ārañjita, ā + pp. of rañjayati, Caus. of rañj or raj, but in meaning different. Perhaps to rac (as *racita) to furnish with, prepare, or better still to be regarded as an idiomatic Pāli form of soundroot *rac (see āracayā°) mixed with rañj, of which we find another example in the double spelling of āracayā (& ārajayā) q. v.] furrowed, cut open, dug up, slashed, torn (perhaps also “beaten”) M.I,178 (hatthipadaṁ dantehi ārañjitaṁ an elephant-track bearing the marks of tusks, i. e. occasional slashes or furrows). (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āraññaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or the forest, sequestered; living in the forest, fond of seclusion, living as hermits (bhikkhū). Freq. spelt araññaka (q. v.). -- Vin.I,92 (bhikkhū); II,32, 197, 217 (bh.), 265 (bh.); M.I,214; A.III,100 sq., 219; IV,21; V,66; J.III,174 (v. l. BB. a°); Miln.342; DhA.II,94 (vihāra). (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āraññakatta: {'def': '【中】住在森林的情况。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. āraññaka, see also araññakatta] the habit of sequestration or living in solitude M.I,214; III,40; A.I,38. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āraññika: {'def': '(adj.) = āraññaka Vin.III,15; A.I,24; Pug.69; Vism.61, 71 (where defined); Miln.341. (Page 107)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āriya: {'def': 'in anāriya at Sn.815 is metric for anariya (q. v.). (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārocanā: {'def': '【阴】公告。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āroceti: {'def': '(ā + ruc + e), 吩咐，告知，公布。 ārocesi, 【过】。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + roceti, Caus. of ruc; cp. BSk. ārocayati Sp. Av. Ś I.9 etc.] to relate, to tell, announce, speak to, address D.I,109, 224; Pv.II,8⁹ (aor, ārocayi); PvA.4, 13 (aññamaññaṁ anārocetvā not speaking to each other), 81, 274 & freq. passim. -- pp. ārocita; Caus. II. ārocāpeti (q. v.). (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārocita: {'def': '[pp. of āroceti] announced, called Vin.II,213 (kāla). (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārocāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ārocāpeti, Caus. of āroceti] announcement DhA.II,167. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】由一个代理人公告或报告。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārocāpeti: {'def': '(āroceti 的【使】)。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Caus. II. of āroceti] to make some one announce, to let somebody know, usually in phrase kālaṁ ā. Sn.p. 111; J.I,115, 125; DhA.II,89; PvA.141. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārodana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ā + rud, cp. āruṇṇa] crying, lamenting A.III,268 sq.; J.I,34; DhA.I,184; II,100. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārodanā: {'def': '【阴】哭，悲叹。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārogatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. a + roga + tā] freedom from illness, health Miln.341. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārogya: {'def': '【中】健康。 ~mada, 【阳】健康的自傲。 ~sālā, 【阴】医院，疗养院。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. aroga, i. e. ā (= a²) + roga + ya] absence of illness, health D.I,11; III,220 (°mada), 235 (°sampadā); M.I,451 (T. ārūgya, v. l. ārogya), 508, 509; S.II,109; A.I,146 (°mada); II,143; III,72; V,135 sq.; Sn.749, 257 = Dh.204 = J.III,196; Nd¹ 160; Vism.77 (°mada pride of health); PvA.129, 198; Sdhp.234. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āroha: {'def': '【阳】爬上，生长，高度，骑士。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) [fr. ā + ruh] -- 1. climbing up, growth, increase, extent, in cpd. °pariṇāha length & circumference S.II,206; A.I,288; II,250; IV,397; V,19; J.III,192; V, 299; VI,20; Vbh.345 (°māna + pariṇāha-māna); SnA 382. -- 2. one who has climbed up, mounted on, a rider, usually in cpd. ass° & hatth° horse-rider & elephantrider S.IV,310; A.II,166 = III,162 (T. ārūha); IV,107; DhsA.305. -- 3. outfit, possession (or increase, as 1?) Sn.420 (vaṇṇ°). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārohaka: {'def': '【阳】骑士。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārohana: {'def': '【中】攀登，登上。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārohati: {'def': '参考 āruhati。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārohaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ā + ruh] climbing, ascending; ascent J.I,70; VI,488; Miln.352; Vism.244; PvA.74. (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āropana: {'def': '【中】放在，上升起，把…交托给。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. āropeti] “putting on to”, impaling Miln.197 (sūl°), 290 (id.). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āropeti: {'def': '[Caus. of āruhati]. -- 1. to make ascend, to lead up to (w. Acc.) PvA.76 (pāsādaṁ), 160 (id.) -- 2. to put on, take up to (w. Acc. or Loc.) Pv.II,9² (yakkhaṁ yānaṁ āropayitvāna); PvA.62 (sarīraṁ citakaṁ ā.), 100 (bhaṇḍaṁ sakaṭesu ā.). -- 3. to put on, commit to the care of, entrust, give over to (w. Loc.) J.I,227; PvA.154 (rajjaṁ amaccesu ā.). -- 4. to bring about, get ready, make PvA.73, 257 (saṅgahaṁ ā. make a collection); SnA 51, 142. ‹-› 5. to exhibit, tell, show, give S.I,160 (ovādaṁ); Miln.176 (dosaṁ); DhA.II,75 (id.) -- 6. vādaṁ āropeti to refute a person, to get the better of (Gen.) Vin.I,60; M.II,122; S.I,160. -- pp. āropita (q. v.). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + rup + e), 穿上，检举，准备好。 āropesi, 【过】。 āropetabba,【潜】。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āropita: {'def': '[pp. of āropeti] -- 1. produced, come forward, set up PvA.2. -- 2. effected, made S.III,12; PvA.92, 257. -- 3. put on (to a stake), impaled PvA.220 (= āvuta). (Page 109)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āruhana: {'def': '【中】登上，攀登。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āruhati: {'def': '(ā + ruh + a) 登上，爬上，攀登。 āruhi, 【过】。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + ruh] to climb, ascend, go up or on to Sn.1014 (aor. āruhaṁ); Sdhp.188; ger. āruhitvā Sn.321 & āruyha J.VI,452; Sn.139 (v. l. abhiruyha); It.71. ‹-› Caus. āropeti (q. v.). (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āruppa: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. arūpa as ā (= a²) -- *rūpya] formless, incorporeal; nt. formless existence D.III,275; M.I,410, cp. 472; III,163; S.I,131 (°ṭṭhāyin); II,123; A.IV,316; It.61; Sn.754; J.I,406; Dhs.1385 (cp. trsl. 57); Vism.338; DA.I,224; SnA 488, 508; Sdhp.5, 10; the four: Vism.III, 326 sq. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中，阳】无色众生，无实体的众生，无色界。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āruṇṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [orig. pp of ā + rud] weeping, crying, lamenting Miln.357. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārā: {'def': '² (indecl.) [Vedic ārād, Abl. as adv.; orig. a root der. fr. *ara remoteness, as in Sk. araṇa foreign & araṇya solitude q. v. under araṇa¹ and arañña] far from, remote (from) (adv. as well as prep. with Abl.) Sn.156 (pamādamhā), 736; Dh.253 (āsavakkhayā; DhA.III,377 expl^s. by dūragata); J.II,449 (jhānabhūmiyā; = dūre ṭhita C.); V,78 (saṁyame; = dūrato C.). See also ārakā.

--cāra [in this comb^n. by Kern, Toev. s. v. unecessarily expl^d. as ārā = ārya; cp. similar phrases under ārakā] a life remote (from evil) A.IV,389. --cārin living far from evil leading a virtuous life D.I,4; M.I,179; III,33; A.III,216, 348; IV,249; V,138, 205; DA.I,72 (= abrahmacariyato dūra-cārin). (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】锥子。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】在远处，远离，遥远的。 ~cārī, 【三】远离而住。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [Sk. ārâ; *ēl “pointed”, as in Ohg. āla = Ger. ahle, Ags. āēl = E awl; Oicel. alr] an awl; see cp. āragga. Perhaps a der. of ārā is āḷakā (q. v.). (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārādhaka: {'def': '【阳】邀请的人，劝解的人。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. ā + rādh] 1. [perhaps for *āraddhaka because of analogy to āraddha of ā + rabh] successful, accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin.I,70 (an° one who fails); M.I,491; II,197 = A.I,69 = Miln.243; S.V,19; A.V,329 (in correlation with āraddhaviriya). -- 2. pleasing, propitiating Miln.227; VvA.220 (°ikā f.). (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārādhana: {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) (either fr. ā + rādh or ā + rabh, cp. ārādhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment D.II,287 (opp. virādhanā failure); M.I,479; II,199; A.V,211 sq.; J.IV,427. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārādhanā: {'def': '【阴】邀请，成就，嬴得赞同。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārādhanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. fr. ārādheti] to be attained, to be won; successful Vin.I,70 (an°); J.II,233 (dur°). (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārādheti: {'def': '(ā + rādh + e), 邀请，取悦，赢得好意，达到。 ārādhesi, 【过】。ārādhita, 【过分】。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of ā + rādh, in meaning 2 confused with ārabhati. In BSk. strangely distorted to ārāgayati; freq. in Divy as well as Av. Ś] -- 1. to please, win favour, propitiate, convince J.I,337 (dārake), 421, 452; II,72 (manusse); IV,274 (for ābhirādheti T.); Vism.73 (ārādhayanto Nāthassa vana-vāsena mānasaṁ); DhA.II,71; Dāvs III,93 (ārādhayi sabbajanaṁ); Miln.352. In older literature only in phrase cittaṁ ārādheti to please one’s heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate D.I,118 sq., 175 (but cp. āraddha-citta to ārabhati); M I85, 341; S.II,107; V,109; J.II,372; Miln.25. -- 2. to attain, accomplish, fulfill, succeed S.V,23 (maggaṁ), 82, 180, 294; It III, (v. l. ārām°); Sn.488 = 509. Cp. ārādhaka 1. -- pp. ārādhita (q. v.). -- See also parābhetvā. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārādhita: {'def': '[pp. of ārādheti; Sk. ārādhita, but BSk. ārāgita, e. g. Divy 131, 233] pleased Sdhp.510. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārāma: {'def': '【阳】 1. 快乐，高兴。 2. 公园。 3. 寺院。 ~pāla, 【阳】公园的看守员。 ~ropa, 【阳】种植者。 ~vatthu, 【中】花园的地点。 ~mika, 【阳】寺院的侍从, 【形】寺院的。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. ārāma, ā + ram] -- 1. pleasure, fondness of (-°), delight, always as adj. (-°) delighting in, enjoying, finding pleasure in (usually comb^d. with rata, e. g. dhammārāma dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) S.I,235; IV,389 sq. (bhav°, upādān°); A.I,35, 37, 130; II,28 (bhāvan°); It.82 (dhamm°); Sn.327 (id.; expl^d. by SnA 333 as rati and “dhamme ārāmo assā ti”); Pug.53 (samagg°); Vbh.351. -- 2. a pleasure-ground, park, garden (lit. sport, sporting); classified at Vin.III,49 as pupph° and phal° a park with flowers or with fruit (i. e. orchard), def. at DhA.III,246 as Veḷuvana-Jīvak’ambavan’ādayo, i. e. the park of Veḷuvana, or the park belonging to Jīvaka or mango-groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin.II,109; D.II,106; Dh.188; Vv 79⁵ (amb° garden of mangoes); VvA.305 (id.); Pv.II,7⁸ (pl. ārāmāni = ārām’ûpavanāni PvA.102). -- (b) (in special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Saṅgha for the benefit of the bhikkhus, where they meet & hold discussions about sacred & secular matters; a place of recreation and meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst the many ārāmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is that of Anāthapiṇḍika (Jetavana; see J.I,92--94) D.I,178; Vin.IV,69; others more frequently mentioned are e. g. the park of Ambapālī (Vin.I,233); of Mallikā (D.I,178), etc. -- Vin.I,39, 140, 283, 291; II,170; III,6, 45, 162; IV,85; A.II,176; Dpvs.V,18.

--pāla keeper of a park or orchard, gardener Vin.II,109; VvA.288. --ropa, --ropana planter, planting of pleasuregroves S.I,33; PvA.151. --vatthu the site of an Ārāma Vin.I,140; II, 170; III,50, 90. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārāmakinī: {'def': '(f.) see ārāmika. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārāmatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. ārāma 1] pleasure, satisfaction A.II,28; III,116; Vbh.381; Miln.233. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】执着，附着。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ārāmika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ārāma] 1. (to ārāma 1) finding delight in, fond of (c. Gen.) (or servant in general?) Miln.6 (saṅghassa trsl. at the service of the order). -- 2. (to ārāma 2) belonging to an Ārāma, one who shares the congregation, an attendant of the Ārāma Vin.I,207 sq.; II,177 (& °pesaka), 211; III,24; IV,40; V,204; A.II,78 (°samaṇuddesa); III,109 (id.), 275 (°pesaka); J.I,38 (°kicca) Vism.74 (°samaṇuddesa). -- f. ārāmakiṇī a female attendant or visitor of an Ārāma Vin.I,208. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārāva: {'def': '【阳】哭声，噪音。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. ārāva, fr. ā + ru] cry, sound, noise Dāvs.IV,46. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārūgya: {'def': 'see ārogya. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārūha: {'def': 'see āroha. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ārūḷha: {'def': '[pp. of āruhati] -- 1. ascended, mounted, gone up, gone on to IV.137; J.VI,452 (T. āruḷha); Vism.135 (nekkhamma-paṭipadaṁ an°); VvA.64 (magga°); PvA.47 (°nāva), 56 (hatthi°). -- 2. come about, effected, made, done PvA.2, 144 (cp. BSk. pratijñām ārūḍha having taken a vow Divy 26). -- 3. (of an ornament) put on (to), arrayed J.VI,153, 488. (Page 108)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(āruhati 的【过分】), 已乘（马），已乘（船）。(p56)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsa: {'def': '³ [Sk. āśa] food, only in cpd. pātarāsa morning food, breakfast Sn.387 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍapātass’etaṁ nāmaṁ SnA 374); DhA.IV,211; see further ref. under pātar; and pacchā-āsa aftermath S.I,74. Can we compare BSk. āsa-pātrī (vessel) Divy 246? Der. fr. āsa is āsaka with abstr. ending āsakattaṁ “cating”, food, in nānā° various food or na + anāsak°) Sn.249. See also nirāsa, which may be taken either as nir + *āśa or nir + *āsā. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '⁴ archaic 3^rd sg. perf. of atthi to be, only in cpd. itihāsa = iti ha āsa “thus it has been”. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ the adj. form of āsā (f.), wish, hope. See under āsā. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ contr.-form of aṁsa in cpd. koṭṭhāsa part., portion etc.: see aṁsa¹. Can we compare BSk. āsapātrī (see next). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsabha: {'def': '[the guṇa- and comp^n. form of usabha, corresponding to Sk. ārṣabha › ṛṣabha, see usabha] (in comp^n.) a bull, peculiar to a bull, bull-like, fig. a man of strong & eminent qualities, a hero or great man, a leader, thus in tār° Sn.687; nar° Sn.684, 696; āsabha-camma bull’s hide J.VI,453 (v. l. usabha°).

--ṭṭhāna (as āsabhaṇṭhāna) “bull’s place”, first place, distinguished position, leadership M.I,69; S.II,27; A.II,8 (C. seṭṭha-ṭṭhāna uttama-ṭṭhāna); III,9; V,33 sq.; DA.I,31; KhA 104. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】像公牛一样的即：强壮的质量和显赫的质量。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】卓著的地位。 ~bhī, (usabha 的【阴】), 壮丽的，大胆的。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsabhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āsabha] bull-like, becoming to a bull, lordly, majestic, imposing, bold; only in phrase °ṁ vācaṁ bhāsati “speak the lordly word” D.II,15, 82; M.III,123j J.I,53; DA.I,91; cp. Dāvs.I,28 (nicchārayi vācaṁ āsabhiṁ). (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsada: {'def': '[ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsādeti] -- 1. approach, dealing with, business with (Acc.), concern, affair, means of acting or getting Vin.II,195 = J.V,336 (mā kuñjara nāgam āsado); M.I,326 (metaṁ āsado = mā etaṁ āsado do not meddle with this, lit., be not this any affair); J I 414 (cakkaṁ āsado you have to do with the wheel; interpreted as adj. in meaning patto = finding, getting); VI,528 (interpreted as aṅkusa a hook, i. e. means of getting something). -- 2. (as adj.) in phrase durāsada hard to sit on, i. e. hard to get at, unapproachable, difficult to attack or manage or conquer Sn.p. 107 (cp. SnA 451); J.VI,272; Vv 50¹⁶ (= anupagamanīyato kenaci pi anāsādanīyato ca durāsado VvA.213); Miln.21; Dpvs.V,21; VI,38; Sdhp.384. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsajja: {'def': '(āsādeti 的【独】), 接近了，侮辱，碰撞。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [ger. of āsādeti, Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; Sk. āsādya] -- 1. sitting on, going to, approaching; allocated, belonging to; sometimes merely as prep. Acc. “near” (cp. āsanna) Sn.418 (āsajja naṁ upāvisi he came up near to him), 448 (kāko va selaṁ ā. nibbijjāpema Gotamaṁ); J.II,95; VI,194; Miln.271. -- 2. put on to (lit. sitting or sticking on), hitting, striking S.I,127 (khaṇuṁ va urasā ā. nibbijjapetha Gotamā “ye’ve thrust as ‘t were your breast against a stake. Disgusted, come ye hence from Gotama” trsl. p. 159; C. expl^s. by paharitvā, which comes near the usual paraphrase ghaṭṭetvā) ‹-› 3. knocking against or “giving one a setting-to”, insulting, offending, assailing D.I,107 (ā. ā. avocāsi = ghaṭṭetvā DA.I,276); A.III,373 (tādisaṁ bhikkhuṁ ā.); J.V,267 (isiṁ ā. Gotamaṁ; C. p. 272 āsādetvā); Pv IV.7¹⁰ (isiṁ ā. = āsādetvã PvA.266). -- 4. “sitting on”, i. e. attending constantly to, persevering, energetically, with energy or emphasis, willingly, spontaneously M.I,250; D.III,258 = A.IV,236 (dānaṁ deti); Vv 10⁶ (dānaṁ adāsiṁ; cp. VvA.55 samāgantvā). See āsada, āsādeti, āsīdeti, āsajjana. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsajjana: {'def': '【中】 1. 碰撞。 2. 侮辱。 3. 执着。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. āsajja in meaning of no. 3] “knocking against”, setting on, insult, offence Vin.II,203 (°ṁ Tathāgataṁ an insult to the T.; quoted as such at VvA.55, where two meanings of ā. are given, corresponding to āsajja 1 & 3, viz. samāgama & ghaṭṭana, the latter in this quot.) = It.86 (so to be read with v. l.; T. has āpajja naṁ); S.I,114 (apuññaṁ pasavi Māro āsajjanaṁ Tathāgataṁ; trsl. “in seeking the T. to assail”); J.V,208. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsajjati: {'def': '(ā + sad + ya), 撞，很生气，执着。 āsajji, 【过】。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [of āsa²] belonging to food, having food, only in neg. an° fasting S.IV,118; Dh.141 (f. ā fasting = bhatta-paṭikkhepa DhA.III,77); J.V,17; VI,63. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsakatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. āsaka] having food, feeding, in an° fasting Sn.249 (= abhojana SnA 292). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsamāna: {'def': '(adj.) [ppr. of āsaṁsati or āsiṁsati, for the usual earlier āsasāna] wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 84⁶ (kiṁ ā = kiṁ paccāsiṁ santo VvA.336); Pv IV.1²⁴ (= āsiṁsamāna patthayamana PvA.226). (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsana: {'def': '【中】座位，坐下。~sālā,【阴】有座位的厅堂。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (?) eating Vism.116 (visam°, cp. visam-āsita Miln.302). See, however, māsana. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nt.) [from āsati] sitting, sitting down; a seat, throne M.I,469; Vin.I,272 (= pallaṅkassa okāsa); S.I,46 (ek° sitting alone, a solitary seat); A.III,389 (an° without a seat); Sn.338, 718, 810, 981; Nd¹ 131; J.IV,435 (āsān’ûdaka-dāyin giving seat & drink); V,403 (id.); VI,413; DhA.II,31 (dhamm° the preacher’s seat or throne); SnA 401; PvA.16, 23, 141.

--âbhihara gift or distinction of the seat J.I,81. --ûpagata endowed with a seat, sitting down Sn.708 (= nisinna SnA 495). --paññāpaka one who appoints seats Vin.II,305. --paṭikkhitta one who rejects all seats, or objects to sitting down D.I,167; A.I,296; II,206; Pug.55. --sālā a hall with seating accommodation Vism.69; DhA.II,65; IV,46. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsanaka: {'def': '(nt.) [āsana + ka] a small seat Vv 1⁵. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsandi: {'def': '(f.) [fr. ā + sad] an extra long chair, a deck-chair Vin.I,192; II,142, 163, 169, 170; D.I,7 (= pamāṇâtikkant’āsanaṁ DA.I,86), 55 = M.I,515 = S.III,307 (used as a bier) A.I,181; J.I,108. See note at Dial. I.11. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】长椅，甲板上的椅子。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsandikā: {'def': '(f.) fr. āsandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin.II,149; KhA 44. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsanika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āsana] having a seat; in ek° sitting by oneself Vism.69. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsanna: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of ā + sad, see āsīdati] near (cp. āsajja¹), opp. dūra J.II,154; DhA II 91; PvA.42, 243. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】接近的。【中】邻近，邻域。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsappanā: {'def': '(fr.) [fr. + sṛp] lit. “creeping on to”, doubt, mistrust, always comb^d. with parisappanā Nd³ 1; Dhs.1004 (trsl. “evasion”, cp. Dhs.trsl. p 116), 1118, 1235; DA.I,69. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsappati: {'def': '(ā + sap + ā) 努力，奋斗，挣扎。 āsappi, 【过】。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsasāna: {'def': '[either grd. for *āsaṁsāna or contracted form of ppr. med. of āsaṁsati (= āsiṁsati) for *asaṁsamāna] hoping, wishing, desiring, longing for Sn.369 (an°; SnA 365 however reads āsayāna), 1090; Th.1, 528; J.IV,18 (= āsiṁsanto C.), 381; V,391 (= āsiṁsanto C.). See anāsasāna, āsaṁsati, āsamāna & āsayāna. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】愿，欲望。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsati: {'def': '(ās + a), 坐。 āsi, 【过】。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[from as] to sit DA.I,208; h. sg. āsi S.I,130. ‹-› pp. āsīna (q. v.). (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsatta: {'def': '(āsajjati 的【过分】), 1. 已附上，已执着。2. 已被咒。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of ā + sañj] (a) lit. hanging on, in phrase kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one’s neck M.I,120; J.I,5. -- (b) fig. attached to, clinging to J.I, 377 (+ satta lagga); ThA.259 (an°). (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of ā + śap] accursed, cursed J.V,446 (an°). (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsatti: {'def': '(f.) [ā + sañj] attachment, hanging on (w. Loc.), dependence, clinging Vin.II,156 = A.I,138; S.I,212; Sn.777 (bhavesu); Nd¹ 51, 221; Nett 12, 128. -- Cp. nirāsattin. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsava: {'def': '[fr. ā + sru, would corresp. to a Sk. *āsrava, cp. Sk. āsrāva. The BSk. āśrava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pāli āsava, cp. Divy 391 & kṣīnāśrava] that which flows (out or on to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C. in Vin.IV,110 (four kinds); B. on D.III,182 (five kinds) DhsA.48; KhA 26; J.IV,222; VI,9. -- 2. discharge from a sore, A.I,124, 127 = Pug.30. -- 3. in psychology, t.t. for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher things). Freedom from the “Āsavas” constitutes Arahantship, & the fight for the extinction of these āsavas forms one of the main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term see Cpd. 227. See also discussion of term āsava (= āsavantī ti āsavā) at DhsA.48 (cp. Expositor pp. 63 sq). See also Cpd. 227 sq., & especially Dhs.trsl. 291 sq. -- The 4 āsavas are kām°, bhav°, diṭṭh°, avijj°, i. e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of life), speculation and ignorance. -- They are mentioned as such at D.II,81, 84, 91, 94, 98, 123, 126; A.I,165 sq., 196; II,211; III,93, 414; IV,79; Ps.I,94, 117; Dhs.1099, 1448; Nd² 134; Nett 31, 114 sq. -- The set of 3, which is probably older (kāma°, bhava°, avijjā°) occurs at M.I,55; A.I,165; III,414; S.IV,256; V,56, 189; It.49; Vbh.364. For other connections see Vin.I,14 (anupādāya āsavehi cittani vimucciṁsu), 17, 20, 182; II,202; III,5 (°samudaya, °nirodha etc.); D.I,83, 167; III,78, 108, 130, 220, 223, 230, 240, 283; M.I,7 sq., 23, 35, 76, 219, 279, 445 (°ṭhāniya); II,22; III,72, 277; S.II,187 sq. (°ehi cittaṁ vimucci); III,45 (id.); IV,107 (id.), 20; V,8, 28, 410; A.I,85 sq. (vaḍḍhanti), 98, 165 (°samudaya, °nirodha etc.), 187; II,154 (°ehi cittaṁ vimuttaṁ), 196; III,21, 93 (°samudaya, °nirodha etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; IV,13, 146 (°pariyādāna end of the ā.), 161 (°vighāta-pariḷāha); V,70, 237; Th.2, 4, 99, 101 (pahāsi āsave sabbe); Sn.162, 374, 535 (pl. āsavāni), 546, 749, 915, 1100; Dh.93, 253, 292; Nd¹ 331 (pubb°); Vbh.42, 64, 426; Pug.11, 13, 27, 30 sq.; Miln.419; DhsA.48; ThA.94, 173; KhA 26; DA.I,224; Sdhp.1; Pgdp 65 (piyāsava-surā, meaning?).

Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the āsavas & to Arahantship following as a result are the foll. passages: (1) āsavānaṁ khaya D.I,156; S.II,29, 214; III 57, 96 sq, 152 sq; IV,105, 175; V,92, 203, 220, 271, 284; A.I,107 sq., 123 sq., 232 sq., 273, 291; II,6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; III 69, 114, 131, 202, 306, 319 sq.; IV,83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; V,10 sq., 36, 69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq.; It.49; Pug.27, 62; Vbh.334, 344; Vism.9; DA.I,224; cp. °parikkhaya A V 343 sq. See also arahatta formula C. -- (2) khīṇāsava (adj.) one whose Āsavas are destroyed (see khīṇa) S.I,13, 48, 53, 146; II 83, 239; III,199, 128, 178; IV,217; A I 77, 109, 241, 266; IV,120, 224, 370 sq.; V 40, 253 sq.; Ps.II 173; cp. parikkhīṇā āsavā A.IV,418, 434, 451 sq.; āsavakhīṇa Sn.370. -- (3) anāsava (adj.) one who is free from the āsavas, an Arahant Vin.II,148 = 164; D.III,112; S I 130; II,214, 222; III,83; IV,128; A.I,81, 107 sq, 123 sq., 273, 291; II,6, 36, 87, 146; III,19, 29, 114, 166; IV,98, 140 sq., 314 sq., 400; A.V,10 sqQ, 36, 242, 340; Sn.1105, 1133; Dh.94, 126, 386; Th.I,100; It.75; Nd² 44; Pv.II,6¹⁵; Pug.27; Vbh.426; Dhs.1101, 1451; VvA.9Q Cp. nirāsava ThA.148. -- Opp. sāsava S III 47; V,232; A.I,81 V.242; Dhs.990; Nett 10; Vism.13, 438. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 流动的。 2. 幽灵。 3. 痛处的流出，4. （贪瞋痴的）漏。~kkhaya, 【阳】漏尽（铲除了贪瞋痴的漏）。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '漏;烦恼', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Āsavana: {'def': '【中】流下。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsavati: {'def': '(ā + su + a) 流动。 āsavi, 【过】。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + sru, cp. Sk. āsravati; its doublet is assavati] to flow towards, come to, occur, happen Nett 116. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsaya: {'def': '【阳】1. 住所，常到的地方。2. 堆积物。3. 倾向。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + śī, cp. in similar meaning & derivation anusaya. The semantically related Sk. āśraya from ā + śri is in P. represented by assaya. Cp. also BSk. āśayataḥ intentionally, in earnest Divy 281; Av. Ś II.161] -- 1. abode, haunt, receptacle; dependence on, refuge, support, condition S.I,38; Vin.III,151; J.II,99; Miln.257; VvA.60; PvA.210; jal° river VvA.47; Pgdp 80; adj. depending on, living in (-°) Miln.317; Nd¹ 362 (bil°, dak° etc.). See also āmāsaya, pakkāsaya. -- 2. (fig.) inclination, intention, will, hope; often comb^d. & compared with anusaya (inclination, hankering, disposition), e. g. at Ps.I, 133; II,158; Vbh.340; Vism.140 (°posana); PvA.197. ‹-› SnA 182 (°vipatti), 314 (°suddhi), KhA 103 (°sampatti). Cp. nirāsaya. -- 3. outflow, excretion Pv III,5³ (gabbh° = gabbha-mala PvA.198); Vism.344. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsayati: {'def': '[ā + śī; lit. “lie on”, cp. Ger. anliegen & Sk. āśaya = Ger. Angelegenheit] to wish, desire, hope, intend J.IV,291 (grd. āsāyana, gloss esamāna). See āsaya. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsaṁsa: {'def': '(adj.) [of *āśaṁsā, see next] hoping, expecting something, longing for A.I,108 = Pug.27 (expl^d. by Pug.A 208 as “so hi arahattaṁ āsaṁsati patthetī ti āsaṁso”); SnA 321, 336. Cp. nir°. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsaṁsati: {'def': '[for the usual āsiṁsati, ā + śaṁs] to expect, hope for, wish Pug.A 208 (= pattheti). See also āsamāna. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsaṁsā: {'def': '(f.) [from ā + śaṁs] wish, desire, expectation, hope J.IV,92. -- Cp. nirāsaṁsa. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsaṅga: {'def': '[ā + saṅga fr. sañj to hang on, cp. Sk. āsaṅga & āsakti] -- 1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit J.IV,11. -- 2. that which hangs on (the body), clothing, garment, dress; adj. dressed or clothed in (-°); usually in cpd. uttarāsaṅga a loose (hanging) outer robe e. g. Vin.I,289; S.IV,290; PvA.73; VvÁ 33 (suddh°), 51 (id.). (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsaṅgin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āsanga] hanging on, attached to J.IV,11. (Page 114)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsaṅkati: {'def': '(ā + sak + ŋ-a), 嫌疑，不信任。 āsaṅki, 【过】。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + śaṅk] to be doubtful or afraid, to suspect, distrust, J.I,151 (pret. āsaṅkittha), 163 (aor. āsaṅki); II, 203; SnA 298. -- pp. āsaṅkita (q v.), (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsaṅkin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. āsaṅkā] fearing, anxious, apprehensive Sn.255 (bhedā°); J.III,192 (id.). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsaṅkita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of āsaṅkati] suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Miln.173, 372 (°parisaṅkita full of apprehension and suspicion); DhA.I,223; VvA.110. -- Cp. ussaṅkita & parisaṅkita. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(āsaṅkati 的【过分】), 已惴惴不安，已可疑，已疑神疑鬼。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsaṅkā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. āśaṅkā fr. ā + śaṅk] fear, apprehension, doubt, suspicion J.I,338; II,383; III,533; VI,350, 370; DhA.III,485; VvA.110. -- Cp. sāsaṅka & nirāsaṅka. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】疑惑，怀疑，恐惧。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsaṅkī: {'def': '【形】参考 āsaṅkita。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsevana: {'def': '(nt.) & āsevanā (f.) [fr. āsevati] -- 1. practice, pursuit, indulgence in Vin.II,117; PvA.45. -- 2. succession, repetition Dhs.1367; Kvu 510 (cp. trsl. 294, 362); Vism.538. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsevanā: {'def': '【阴】练习，追求，结交。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsevati: {'def': '(ā + sev + a), 结交，练习，与… 时常交往。 āsevi, 【过】。 āsevita,【过分】。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + sev] to frequent, visit; to practise, pursue, indulge, enjoy A.I,10; Sn.73 (cp. Nd² 94); Ps.II,93 (maggaṁ). -- pp. āsevita. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsevita: {'def': '[pp. of āsevati] frequented, indulged, practised, enjoyed J.I,21 (V.141; āsevita-nisevita); II,60; Sdhp.93, 237. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsi: {'def': '(as 的【过，叁，单】), 他是。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Āsiṁ 3^rd & 1^st sg. aor. of atthi (q. v.). (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsikkhita: {'def': '[pp. of ā + śikṣ, Sk. āśikṣita] sohooled, instructed PvA.67, 68. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsitta: {'def': '[pp. of āsiñcati, Sk. āsikta] sprinkled, poured out, anointed J.V,87; Pug.31; Miln.286; DhsA.307; DhA.I,10; VvA.69. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】āsiñcati。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsittaka: {'def': '(adj.) [āsitta + ka] mixed, mingled, adulterated Vin.II,123 (°ûpadhāna “decorated divan”?); ThA.61, 168 (an° for asecanaka, q. v.). (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】佐料。 āsittakupadhāna, 【中】佐料的容器。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsiñcati: {'def': '[ā + sic, cp. abhisiñcati & avasiñcati] to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin.I,44; II,208; J.IV,376; Vv 79⁶ (= siñcati VvA.307); PvA.41 (udakena), 104, 213 (ger. °itvā). ‹-› pp. āsitta (q. v.). Cp. vy°. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + sic + ŋ-a), 洒，灌注。 āsiñci, 【过】。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsiŋ: {'def': '(as 的【过，壹，单】), 我是。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsiŋsaka: {'def': '【形】愿望的，积极的，候选人。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsiŋsanā: {'def': '【阴】希望，欲望。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsiŋsati: {'def': '(ā + siŋs + a), 希望，欲望。 āsiŋsi, 【过】。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsiṁsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ā + siṁsati, cp. āsaṁsā] wishing, aspiring after, praying for Miln.342. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsiṁsanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āsiṁsanā] hoping for something, lit. praising somebody for the sake of gain, cadging ThA.217 (for āsaṁsuka Th.2, 273). (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsiṁsaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of āsiṁsati] to be wished for, desirable Miln.2 (°ratana). (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsiṁsanā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. ā + śaṁs, cp. āsiṁsati] desire, wish, craving J.V,28; Dhs.1059, 1136 (+ āsiṁsitatta). As āsīsanā at Nett 53. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsiṁsati: {'def': '[Sk. āśaṁsati, ā + śaṁs, cp. also śās & āsāsati, further abhisaṁsati, abhisiṁsati & āsaṁsati] to hope for, wish, pray for (lit. praise for the sake of gain), desire, (w. Acc.) S.I,34, 62; Sn.779, 1044, 1046 (see Nd² 135); J.I,267; III,251; IV,18; V,435; VI,43; Nd¹ 60; Mhvs 30, 100; VvA.337; PvA.226 (ppr. āsiṁsamāna for āsamāna, q. v.). (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsiṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of āsāsati, Sk. āśiṣṭa] wished or longed for PvA.104. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(āsiñsati 的【过分】), 1. 已希望，已渴望。 2. 已受祝福。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsu: {'def': '【无】很快地。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'expletive particle = assu³ J.V,241 (v. l. assu; nipātamattaṁ C. p.243). (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsumbhati: {'def': '(ā + subh + ŋ-a), 丢下一些液体。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& Āsumhati) [ā + śumbh to glide] to bring to fall, throw down or round, sling round Vin.IV,263, 265; Vv 50¹¹ (°itvāna); J.III,435 (aor. āsumhi, gloss khipi). (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsuŋ: {'def': '(as 的【过，叁，复】), 他们是。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsuṁ: {'def': '3^rd pl. aor. of atthi. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. āśaḥ f.] expectation, hope, wish, longing, desire; adj. āsa (-°) longing for, anticipating, desirous of Vin.I,255 (°avacchedika hope-destroying), 259; D.II,206; III,88; M.III,138 (āsaṁ karoti); A.I,86 (dve āsā), 107 (vigat-āso one whose longings have gone); Sn.474, 634, 794, 864; J.I,267, 285; V,401; VI,452 (°chinna = chinnāsa C.); Nd¹ 99, 261, 213 sq; Vv 37¹³ (perhaps better to be read with v. l. SS ahaṁ, cp. VvA.172); Pug.27 (vigat° = arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāso Pug.A 208); Dhs.1059 (+ āsiṁsanā etc.), 1136; PvA.22 (chinn° disappointed), 29 (°âbhibhūta), 105; Dāvs.V,13; Sdhp.78, 111, 498, 609. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】希望，欲望，渴望。 ~bhaṅga, 【阳】失望。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsādeti: {'def': '[Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsanna] ‹-› 1. to lay hand on, to touch, strike; fig. to offend, assail, insult M.I,371; J.I,481; V,197; aor. āsādesi Th.1, 280 (mā ā. Tathāgate); ger. āsādetvā J.V,272; Miln.100, 205 (°ayitvā); PvA.266 (isiṁ), āsādiya J.V,154 (āsādiya metri causa; isiṁ, cp. āsajja³), & āsajja (q. v.); infin. āsāduṁ J.V,154 & āsādituṁ ibid.; grd. āsādanīya Miln.205; VvA.213 (an°). -- 2. to come near to (c. Acc.), approach, get J.III,206 (khuracakkaṁ). (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + sad + e), 犯罪，攻击，侮辱。 āsādesi, 【过】。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsāsamāna: {'def': '【现分】逗留，久留。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsāsati: {'def': '[cp. Sk. āśāsati & āśāsti, ā + śās] to pray for, expect, hope; confounded with śaṁs in āsaṁsati & āsiṁsati (q. v.) & their derivations. -- pp. āsiṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsāvati: {'def': '(f.) N. of a creeper (growing at the celestial grove Cittalatā) J.III,250, 251. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsāḷha: {'def': '【阳】阿沙荼月（月份名，大约在六月至七月之间）。 āsāḷhi, 【形】箕宿 (pubbāsāḷha) 与斗宿 (uttarāsāḷha) 的连接。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsāḷhā: {'def': '& Āsāḷhī (f.) [Sk. āṣāḍha] N. of a month (JuneJuly) and of a Nakkhatta; only in comp^n. as Āsaḷha° & Āsaḷhi°, viz. °nakkhatta J.I,50; SnA 208; °puṇṇamā J.I,63; DhA.I,87; SnA 199; VvA.66; PvA.137; °māsa SnA 378 (= vassûpanāyikāya purimabhāge A.); VvA.307 (= gimhānaṁ pacchimo māso). (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsāṭikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Mārāṭhi āsāḍī] a fly’s egg, a nit M.I,220 sq.; A.V,347 sq., 351, 359; Nett 59; J.III,176. (Page 115)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】蝇卵。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsī: {'def': '【阴】祝福，（毒蛇的）毒牙。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsīdati: {'def': '[cp. Sk. āsīdati, ā + sad] -- 1. to come together, lit. to sit by D.I,248 (v. l. BB ādisitvā for āsīditvā, to be preferred?). -- 2. to come or go near, to approach (w. Acc.), to get (to) A.III,69 (āsīvisaṁ), 373 (na sādhurūpaṁ āsīde, should perhaps be read without the na); J.IV,56. -- 3. to knock against, insult, offend attack J.V, 267 (Pot. āsīde = pharusa-vacanehe kāyakammena vā gbaṭṭento upagaccheyya C.). -- pp. āsanna (q. v.). See also āsajja, āsajjana, āsada & Caus. āsādeti. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsīna: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of ās, see āsati] sitting S.I,195 = Nd² 136; Sn.1105, 1136; Dh.227, 386; J.I,390; III,95; V, 340; VI,297; Dāvs II.17. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(āsati 的【过分】), 已坐，已就坐。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsīsanā: {'def': 'see āsiṁsanā. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsītika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. asīta] 80 years old M.II,124; J.III,395; SnA 172. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】八十岁。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m.) [etym.? Cp. BSk. āsītakī Lal. V. 319] a certain plant M I 80 = 245 (°pabba). (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āsīvisa: {'def': 'Derivation uncertain. The BSk. āsīviṣa (e. g. Jtm 31⁶¹) is a Sanskritisation of the Pali. To suppose this to come from ahi + visa (snake’s poison) would give a wrong meaning, and leave unexplained the change from ahi to āsi] a snake Vin.IV,108; S.IV,172; A.II,110; III, 69; J.I,245; II,274; IV,30, 496; V,82, 267; Pug.48; Vism.470 (in comp.); DhA.I,139; II,8, 38; SnA 334, 458, 465; VvA.308. (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蛇，毒在毒牙中的。(p60)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āsīyati: {'def': '[etym. doubtful; Trenckner Miln.p. 422 = ā + śyā to freeze or dry up, but taken by him in meaning to thaw, to warm oneself; Müller, P. Gr. 40 same with meaning “cool oneself”; Morris’J.P. T. S. 1884, 72 as ā + śrā or śrī to become ripe, come to perfection, evidently at fault because of śrā etc. not found in Sk. More likely as a Pass. formation to be referred to ā + śī as in āsaya, i. e. to abide etc.] to have one’s home, one’s abode or support in (Loc.), to live in, thrive by means of, to depend on Miln.75 (kaddame jāyati udake āsīyati i. e. the lotus is born in the mud and is supported or thrives by means of the water). (Page 116)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātapa: {'def': '【阳】阳光。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + tapa] -- 1. sun-heat Sn.52; J.I,336; Dhs.617; Dpvs.I,57; VvA.54; PvA.58. -- 2. glow, heat (in general) Pv.I,7⁴; Sdhp.396. -- 3. (fig.) (cp. tapa²) ardour, zeal, exertion PvA.98 (viriyā-tapa; perhaps better to be read °ātāpa q. v.). Cp. ātappa.

--vāraṇa “warding off the sun-heat”, i. e. a parasol, sun-shade Dāvs.I,28; V,35. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātapati: {'def': '[ā + tap] to burn J.III,447. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + tap + a) 照耀。 ātapi, 【过】。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ātapatta: {'def': '【中】遮阳伞，伞。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ātapatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. of ātapa] glowing or burning state, heat Sdhp.122. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātappa: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. *ātāpya, fr. ātāpa] ardour, zeal, exertion D.I,13; III,30 sq., 104 sq., 238 sq.; M.III,210; S.II,132, 196 sq.; A.I,153; III,249; IV,460 sq.; V,17 sq.; Sn.1062 (= ussāha ussoḷhi thāma etc. Nd² 122); J.III,447; Nd¹ 378; Vbh.194 (= vāyāma); DA.I,104. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】热心，努力。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ātata: {'def': '【中】单面鼓。~vitata,【中】双边都包皮革的鼓。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. ā + tan, pp. tata; lit. stretched, covered over] generic name for drums covered with leather on one side Dpvs XIV.14; VvA.37 (q. v. for enum^n. of musical instruments), 96. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātatta: {'def': '(ātapati 的【过分】), 已加热，已烧焦。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + tatta¹, pp. of ā-tapati] heated, burnt. scorched, dry J.V,69 (°rūpa = sukkha-sarīra C.). (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātaṅka: {'def': '[etym. uncertain; Sk. ātaṅka] illness, sickness, disease M.I,437; S.III,1; Sn.966 (°phassa, cp. Nd¹ 486). Freq. in cpd. appātaṅka freedom from illness, health (cp. appābādha) D.I,204; III,166; A.III,65, 103; Miln.14. -- f. abstr. appātaṅkatā M.I,124. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】疾病，弊病。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ātaṅkin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ātaṅka] sick, ill J.V,84 (= gilāna C.). (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āthabbaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [= athabbaṇa, q. v.] the Atharva Veda as a code of magic working formulas, witchcraft, sorcery Sn.927 (v. l. ath°, see interpreted at Nd¹ 381; expl^d. as āthabbaṇika-manta-ppayoga at SnA 564). (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āthabbaṇika: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. athabbana] one conversant with magic, wonder-worker, medicine-man Nd¹ 381; SnA 564. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātitheyya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ati + theyya] great theft (?) A.I,93; IV, 63 sq. (v. l. ati° which is perhaps to be prcferred). (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātu: {'def': '[dialectical] father M.I,449 (cp. Trenckner’s note on p. 567: the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of patois). (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātuma: {'def': '【阳】参考 atta。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ātuman: {'def': '[Vedic ātman, diaeretic form for the usual contracted attan; only found in poetry. Cp. also the shortened form tuman] self. Nom. sg. ātumo Pv IV.5² (= sabhāvo PvA.259), ātumā Nd¹ 69 (ātumā vuccati attā), 296 (id.), & ātumāno Nd¹ 351; Acc. ātumānaṁ Sn.782 (= attānaṁ SnA 521), 888, 918; Loc. ātume Pv.II,13¹¹ (= attani C.). (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātura: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. ātura, cp. BSk. ātura, e. g. Jtm 31⁷⁰] ill, sick, diseased; miserable, affected S.III,1 (°kāya); A.I,250; Sn.331; Vv 83¹⁴ (°rūpa = abhitunna-kāya VvA.328); J.I,197 (°anna “food of the miserable”, i. e. last meal of one going to be killed; C. expl^s. as maraṇabhojana), 211 (°citta); II,420 (°anna, as above); III,201; V,90, 433; VI,248; Miln.139, 168; DhA.I,31 (°rūpa); PvA.160, 161; VvA.77; Sdhp.507. Used by Commentators as syn. of aṭṭo, e. g. at J.IV,293; SnA 489. --anātura healthy, well, in good condition S.III,1; Dh.198. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】受到影响的，不舒服，生病的。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ātāpa: {'def': '【阳】赤热，热，热心。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + tāpa fr. tap; cp. tāpeti] glow, heat; fig. ardour, keen endeavour, or perhaps better “torturing, mortifica‹-› tion” Miln.313 (cittassa ātāpo paritāpo); PvA.98 (viriya°). Cp. ātappa & ātāpana. (Page 97)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātāpana: {'def': '【中】禁欲，苦修，折磨。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [ā + tāpana] tormenting, torture, mortification M.I,78; A.I,296 (°paritāpana); II,207 (id.); Pug.55 (id.); Vism.3 (id.). (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātāpeti: {'def': '[ā + tāpeti] to burn, scorch; fig. to torment, inflict pain, torture M.I,341 (+ paritāpeti); S.IV,337; Miln.314, 315. (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + tap + e), 使烧焦，折磨。 ātāpesi, 【过】。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ātāpin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ātāpa, cp. BSk. ātāpin Av. Ś I.233; II, 194 = Divy 37; 618] ardent, zealous, strenuous, active D.III,58, 76 sq., 141 (+ sampajāna), 221, 276; M.I,22, 56, 116, 207, 349; II,11; III,89, 128, 156; S 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; II,21, 136 sq.; III,73 sq.; IV,37, 48, 54, 218; V,165, 187, 213; A.II,13 sq.; III 38, 100 sq.; IV, 29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; V,343 sq.; Sn.926; Nd¹ 378; It.41, 42; Vbh.193 sq.; Miln.34, 366; Vism.3 (= viriyavā); DhA.I,120; SnA 157, 503. -- Freq. in the formula of Arahantship “eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto”: see arahant II. B. See also satipaṭṭhāna. ‹-› Opp. anātāpin S.II,195 sq.; A.II,13; It.27 (+ anottappin). (Page 98)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ātāpī: {'def': '【形】热心的，奋发的。(p51)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āva: {'def': '(misery, misfortune) see avā. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvaha: {'def': 'āvahanaka, 【形】 (在【合】中), 带来的，含有…的，有助于…的，有益于…的。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. ā + vah] bringing, going, causing Pv.II,9²⁴ (sukh°); Vv 22¹¹ (id); Dāvs II.37; PvA.86 (upakār°), 116 (anatth°); Sdhp.15, 98, 206. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvahana: {'def': '(adj) (-°) [= āvaha] bringing, causing Th.1, 519; Sn.256. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】带来，运输。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvahanaka: {'def': '(adj.-nt) [= āvahana] one who brings VvA.114 (sukhassa). (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvahati: {'def': '(ā + vah + a) 带来，引起，导致，有利于。 āvahi, 【过】。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + vahati] to bring, cause, entail, give S.I,42 = Sn.181, 182 (āvahāti sukhaṁ metri causā); J.III,169; V, 80; Sn.823; Nd¹ 302; PvA.6. -- Pass. āvuyhati VvA.237 (ppr. °amāna). (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvajati: {'def': '[ā + vajati, vraj] -- 1. to go into, to or towards J.III,434; IV,49, 107. -- 2. to return, come back J.V,24, 479. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvajjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. āvajjati, cp. BSk. āvarjana in diff. meaning] turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the mind. -- See discussion of term at Cpd. 85, 227 (the C. derive āvajjana fr. āvaṭṭeti to turn towards, this confusion being due to close resemblance of jj and ṭṭ in writing); also Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4 (on Kvu 380 which has āvaṭṭanā), 282 n. 2 (on Kvu 491 āvaṭṭanā). -- Ps.II,5, 120; J.II,243; Vbh.320; Miln.102 sq.; Vism.432; DA.I,271. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvajjati: {'def': '[not with Senart M Vastu 377 = ava + dhyā, but = Sk. āvṛṇakti ā + vṛj, with pres. act. āvajjeti = Sk. āvarjayati] -- 1. to reflect upon, notice, take in, advert to, catch (a sound), listen J.I,81; II,423; V,3; Miln.106. -- 2. to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin.I,286 (kumbhiṁ); J.II,102 (gloss āsiñcati). -- Caus. āvajjeti (q. v.). (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + vajj + a), 1. 思索。 2.（船）翻倒。āvajji,【过】。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvajjeti: {'def': '(ā + vajj + e), 1. 沉思。 2. 观察。 3. 翻转。 āvajjesi, 【过】。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of āvajjati] 1. to turn over, incline, bend M.III,96; J.IV,56 (so read for āvijjhanto); DA.I,10 (kāyaṁ). ‹-› 2. to incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think, heed, listen for. According to Cpd. 227 often paraphrased in C. by pariṇāmeti. -- J.I,69, 74, 81, 89, 108, 200; Miln.297; DhA.II,96; PvA.181 (= manasikaroti). -- 3. to cause to yield A.III,27 (perhaps better āvaṭṭ°). ‹-› pp. āvajjita (q. v.). (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvajjita: {'def': '[pp. of āvajjeti cp. BSk. āvarjita, e. g. Divy 171; Itin 221] bent, turned to, inclined; noticed, observed Miln.297; Vism.432 (citta); Sdhp.433. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvajjitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. āvajjita] inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Ps.II,27 sq. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvalī: {'def': '【阴】排，线。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. āvalī & see valī] a row, range J.V,69; DA.I,140. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvapana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. āvapati] sowing, dispersing, offering,depositing, scattering J.I,321. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvapati: {'def': '[a + vap] to give away, to offer, to deposit as a pledge Miln.279. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvara: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ā + vṛ] obstructing, keeping off from J.V,325 (so to be read in ariya-magg-âvara). (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvarati: {'def': '(ā + var + a), 关在外面，遮住，阻隔。 āvari, 【过】。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + vṛ, cp. āvuṇāti] to shut out from (Abl.), hold back from, refuse, withhold, obstruct M.I,380 (dvāraṁ); Sn.922 (pot. °aye, cp. Nd¹ 368); DA.I,235 (dvāraṁ); Dpvs.I,38. -- pp. āvaṭa and āvuta² (q. v.). (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvaraṇa: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati; BSk. āvaraṇa in pañc’āvaraṇāni Divy 378] shutting off, barring out, withstanding; nt. hindrance, obstruction, bar Vin.I,84 (°ṁ karoti to prohibit, hinder); II,262 (id.); D.I,246 (syn. of pañca nīvaraṇāni); S.V,93 sq.; A.III,63; J.I,78 (an°); V,412 (nadiṁ °ena bandhāpeti to obstruct or dam off the river); Sn.66 (pahāya pañc’āvaraṇāni cetaso, cp. Nd² 379), 1005 (an°-dassāviṇ); Ps.I,131 sq.; II,158 (an°); Pug.13; Dhs.1059, 1136; Vbh.341, 342; Miln.21 (dur° hard to withstand or oppose). -- dant° “screen of the teeth”, lip J.IV,188; VI,590. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】关闭，障碍，棒（用作栅栏），屏（掩蔽物）。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvaraṇatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. āvaraṇa] keeping away from, withholding from A III 436. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvaraṇīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. fr. āvarati], M.I,273; an° not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct M.III,3; Miln.157. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】阻碍的，障碍的。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvariya: {'def': '【独】阻隔了。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvasatha: {'def': '【阳】住所，住处，休息的房子。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. āvasatha, fr. ā + vas] dwelling-place, habitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin I 226 (°âgāra restinghouse); IV,304 (= kavāṭabaddha); S.I,94, 229; IV,329; Sn.287, 672; J.IV,396; VI,425; Pug.51; Miln.279. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvasati: {'def': '(ā + vas + a) 居住，住，居。 āvasi, 【过】。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + vas] to live at or in, to inhabit, reside, stay M.II,72; S.I,42; Sn.43, 805, 1134; Nd¹ 123, 127; Nd² 133; J.VI,317. -- pp. āvuttha (q. v.). (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvatta: {'def': '【形】 (āvattati 的【过分】), 已后退。【中】旋紧，旋转，弯曲。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [Sk. āvarta, of ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa[ winding, turn, bent J.I,70 (in a river); Nett 81 (v. l. āvaṭṭa?), 105 (°hārasampāta). (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [pp. of āvattati] gone away to, fallen back to, in phrase hīnāy’āvatta (see same phrase under āvattati) M.I,460; S.II,50; J.I,206. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvattaka: {'def': 'āvattī, 【形】回来，返回的人。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [āvatta + ka] turning, in dakkhiṇ° turning to the right, dextrorsal D.II,18; cp. dakkhiṇâvatta at DA.I,259. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvattana: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [Sk. āvartana] turning; turn, return Nett 113; Miln.251. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】转，回返。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvattanin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āvattana] turning round or back Th.1, 16 (cp. āvaṭṭanin). (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvattati: {'def': '(ā + vat + a), 回去，回过头。 āvatti, 【过】。 āvattita, 【过分】。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + vattati, of vṛt] to turn round, come to, go back, go away to, turn to; only in phrase hīnāya āvattati to turn to “the low”, i. e. to give up orders & return to the world Vin.I,17; M.I,460; S.II,231; IV,191; Sn.p. 92 (= osakkati SnA 423); Ud.21; Pug.66; Miln.246. ‹-› pp. āvatta (q. v.). Cp. āvaṭṭati. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvatteti: {'def': '参考 āvaṭṭeti。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvatthika: {'def': '【形】适合的，最初的，原始的。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ā + vatthika] befitting, original, inherent (one of the 4 kinds of nomenclature) Vism.210 = KhA 107. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvattin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. āvatta, cp. āvaṭṭin in diff. meaning] returning, coming back, one who returns, in spec. meaning of one who comes back in transmigration, syn. with āgāmin (an°), only in neg. anāvattin not returning, a non-returner, with °dhamma not liable to return at D.II,156; III,132; S.V,346, 357, 376, 406; M.I,91; DA.I,313. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvattiya: {'def': '【形】可转的，可归还的。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvaṭa: {'def': '(āvarati 的【过分】), 已复盖，已戴（面纱），已禁止。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. āvṛta, pp. of ā + vṛ] covered, veiled, shut off against, prohibited D.I,97, 246; M.I,381 (°dvāra); J.VI,267. --anāvaṭa uncovered, unveiled, exposed, open D.I,137 (°dvāra); III,191 (°dvāratā); S.I,55; J.V,213; Pv III,6⁴; Miln.283. Cp. āvuta² & vy°. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvaṭṭa: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [Sk. āvarta, ā + vṛt] -- 1. turning round, winding, twisting M.I,382; S.I,32 (dvi-r-ā° turning twice); J.II,217; SnA 439 (°gaṅgā). -- 2. turned, brought round, changed, enticed M.I,381; DhA.II,153. -- 3. an eddy, whirlpool, vortex M.I,461 = A.II,123 (°bhaya); Miln.122, 196, 377. -- 4. circumference J.V,337; Dāvs.V,24; DhA III 184. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 圆周。 2. 漩涡。 3. 扭转的。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvaṭṭana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa 2 and āvaṭṭanin] turning, twisting; enticement, snare, temptation J.III,494; DhA.II,153. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 旋转的。 2. 诱惑。 3. 着魔被魔鬼控制了的状态。 āvaṭṭī,【形】诱骗。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvaṭṭanin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āvaṭṭana] turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing M.I,375, 381; A.II,190; J.II,330 = IV.471; DA.I,250. -- Cp. etymologically the same, but semantically diff. āvattanin. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvaṭṭanā: {'def': '(f.) [most likely for āvajjana. q. v. & see also Kvu trsl. 221, 282] turning to (of the mind), adverting, apprehending Kvu 380, 491. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvaṭṭati: {'def': '[= āvattati] in phrase ā. vivaṭṭati to turn forward & backward Vism.504. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + vaṭṭ + a), 转向前的又转向后的，旋转。 āvaṭṭi, 【过】。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvaṭṭeti: {'def': '[ā + vatteti, Caus. of vṛt, cp. BSk. āvartayati to employ spells Divy 438] to turn round, entice, change, convert, bring or win over M.I,375, 381, 383, 505; A.III,27; DA.I,272. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + vaṭṭ + e),1. 旋转。 2. 诱骗，转换。(p57)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvaṭṭin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. āvaṭṭa instead of āvaṭṭana] only at M.I,91 in neg. an° not enticed by (Loc.), i. e. kāmesu. ‹-› Cp. āvattin. (Page 111)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvedha: {'def': '[cp. Sk. āviddha, ā + pp. of vyadh] piercing, hole, wound J.II,276 (v. l. aveddha; C. = viddha-ṭṭhāne vaṇa). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvedhika: {'def': '(adj. f. scil. pannā) [ā + vedhaka of āvedha, vyadh, but confused with āveṭh° of ā + veṣṭ, cp. āveṭhana & nibbedhaka] piercing, penetrating; or ravelling, turning, rolling up or round (cp. āvijjhati which is derived from ā + vyadh, but takes its meaning from āveṭheti), discrimination, thinking over J.II,9 (+ nibbedhikā, v. l. for both ṭh). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvelita: {'def': '(ḷ?) [pp. of ā + vell, cp. āveḷa & BSk. āviddha curved, crooked Av. Ś I.87, Lal. V. 207] turned round, wound, curved J.VI,354 (°singika with curved horns, v. l. āvellita). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvellita: {'def': '【过分】已弯，已弯曲，已弄卷。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvelā: {'def': '【阴】头戴的花环。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvesana: {'def': '【中】 1. 入口。 2. 工场。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. āvisati] entrance; workshop; living-place, house Vin II 117 (°vitthaka, meaning?); M II 53; Pv.II,9¹⁵. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āveḷa: {'def': '(adj. & °ā f.) [not with Müller P.Gr. 10, 30, 37 = Sk. āpīḍa, but fr. ā + veṣṭh to wind or turn round, which in P. is represented by āveṭheti as well as āvijjhati; ḷ then standing for either ḍh (ṭh) or dh (āvedha, q. v.). There may have been an analogy influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. āveḷita. Müller refers to āveḷā rightly the late dial. (Prk.) āmela] -- 1. turning round, swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance, with reference to the rays of the Buddha at J.I,12, 95, 501. ‹-› 2. (f.) a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over the head Vv 36² (kañcan°; = āveḷa-pilandhana VuA 167). See āveḷin. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āveḷin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āveḷā] wearing garlands or other headornaments, usually in f. °inī J.V,409 (= kaṇṇālaṅkārehi yuttā C.); Vv 30² (Voc. āvelinī, but at id. p. 48² āveline), 32³; VvA.125 (on Vv 30² expl^s. as ratana-maya-pupph’‹-› āveḷavatī). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āveṇi: {'def': '(adj) (-°) [according to Trenckner, Notes 75 fr. ā + vinā “Sine quā non”, but very doubtful] special, peculiar, separate Vin.II,204 (°uposatha etc.); J.I,490 (°saṅgha-kammāni). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āveṇika: {'def': '【形】特别的，例外的。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āveṇi; cp. BSk. āveṇika Av. Ś I.14, 108; Divy 2, 182, 268, 302] special, extraordinary, exceptional S.IV,239; A.V,74 sq.; Vism.268; VvA.112 (°bhāva peculiarity, specialty), KhA 23, 35. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āveṇiya: {'def': '(adj.) = āveṇika Vin.I,71; J.IV,358; VI,128. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āveṭhana: {'def': '【中】旋绕的，圆，团在一起的东西。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [ā + veṭhana, veṣṭ] rolling up, winding up or round, fig. explanation Miln.28 (+ nibbeṭhana, lit. rolling up and rolling down, ravelling & unravelling), 231 (°viniveṭhana). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āveṭheti: {'def': '(ā + veṭh + e), 拧，扭曲，卷，包起来。 āveṭhesi, 【过】。 āveṭhita, 【过分】。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āveṭhita: {'def': '[pp. of āveṭheti, ā + veṣṭ, cp. āvedhikā] turned round, slung round or over J.IV,383 sq. (v. l. āvedhita & āveḷita, C. expl^s. by parivattita). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvi: {'def': '(adv.) [Sk. āviḥ, to Gr. a]i/w to hear, Lat. audio (fr. *auizdiō) to hear] clear, manifest, evident; openly, before one’s eyes, in full view. Only in phrase āvi vā raho openly or secret A.V,350, 353; Pv.II,7¹⁶ = DhA.IV,21 (āvī v. l.), expl^d. at PvA.103 by pakāsanaṁ paresaṁ pākaṭavasana. Otherwise in foll. cpds. (with kar & bhū): °kamma making clear, evidence, explanation Vin.II,88; III,24; Pug.19, 23; °karoti to make clear, show, explain D.III,121; Sn.84, 85, 349; J.V,457; Pug.57; VvA.79, 150; °bhavati (°bhoti) to become visible or evident, to be explained, to get clear J.I,136; Vism.287 (fnt. āvibhavissati); DhA.II,51, 82; bhāva appearance, manifestation D.I,78; A.III,17; J.II,50, 111; Vism.390 sq. (revelation, opp. tirobhāva). Cp. pātur. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】公开地，在眼前。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āviddha: {'def': '(āvijjhati 的【过分】)。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of āvijjhati 2, cp. BSk. āviddha in meaning curved, crooked Av. S.I,87 Lal. V. 207] whirling or spinning round, revolving; swung round, set into whirling motion J.IV,6 (cakkaṁ = kumbhakāra-cakkam iva bhamati C.); V,291. What does an-āviddha at PvA.135 mean? (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvijjhana: {'def': '【中】绕着地走，绕着地旋转。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(so for āviñchana & āviñjana) (adj.-n.) [fr. āvijjhati, lit. piercing through, i. e. revolving axis] -- 1. (= āvijjhati 2) swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in āvijjhana-rajju a loose, rope, esp. in mythology the swinging or whirling rope by which Sakka holds the world’s wheel or axis, in the latter sense at DhA.II,143 (T. āviñch° (v. l. āvijj°) = III,97, 98 (where āviñjanaṭṭhāna for °rajju). Otherwise a rope used in connection with the opening & shutting of a door (pulling rope?) Vin.II,120, 148; J.V,298, 299 (T. āviñj°, v. l. āvicch° & āvij°). -- 2. (cp. āvijjhati 3) going to, approach, contact with DhsA.312 (°rasa, T. āviñj°, v. l. āviñch°; or is it “encompassing”? = āvijjhati 1 ?); Vism.444 (āviñjanarasa). -- 3. (cp. āvijjhati 5) pulling, drawing along Vin.III,121 (= ākaḍḍhanā nāma). (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvijjhanaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. āvijjhati in meaning 2] whirling round, that which spins round, the whirling-round wheel (or pole) of the world (cp. the potter’s wheel), the worldaxis DhA.II,146 (T. āviñch°). (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvijjhati: {'def': '(āviñjati, āviñchati) [ā + vijjhati of vyadh to pierce; thus recognised by Morris J P T S. 1884, 72, against Trenckner, Notes 59 (to piñj) & Hardy Nett. Ind. = vicchāy] -- 1. to encircle, encompass, comprise, go round, usually in ger. āvijjhitvā (w. Acc.) used as prep. round about, near J.I,153 (khettaṁ), 170 (pokkharaṇiṁ); DA.I,245 (nagaraṁ bahi avijjhitvā round the outer circle of the town). Ordinarily = go round (Acc.) at J.IV,59 (chārika-puñjaṁ). -- 2. [as in lit. Sk.] to swing round, brandish, twirl, whirl round Vin.III,127 (daṇḍaṁ āviñji); M.III,141 (matthena āviñjati to churn); J.I,313; V,291 (cakkaṁ, of a potter’s wheel); SnA 481 (T. āviñj°, v. l. āvijjh°; see āracaya°); DhA.II,277 (āviñchamāna T.; v. l. āsiñciy°, āvajiy°, āgañch°). -- 3. to resort to, go to, approach, incline to S.IV,199 (T. āviñch°; v. l. avicch° & āviñj°); Nett 13. -- 4. to arrange, set in order J.II,406. ‹-› 5. to pull (?) A.IV,86 (kaṇṇasotani āvijjeyyāsi, v. l. āvijj°, āviñj°, āvicc°, āviñch°; cp. Trenckner, Notes 59 āviñjati “to pull”). -- pp. āviddha (q. v.). (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + vidh + ya), 1. 环绕，绕着地走，绕着地旋转。 2. 刺穿过。 āvijjhi, 【过】。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvila: {'def': '【形】 1. 煽起的，搅动的。 2. 肮脏的。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [is it a haplological contraction from ā + vi + lul to roll about?] stirred up, agitated, disturbed, stained, soiled, dirty A.I,9; III,233; J.V,16, 90 (ābila); Nd¹ 488 (+ luḷita), 489; ThA.251; DA.I,226. More frequent as anāvila undisturbed, clean, pure, serene D.I,76; S.III,83; IV,118; A.I,9; III,236; Sn.160; Dh.82, 413; J.III, 157; Miln.35; VvA.29, 30; ThA.251. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvilati: {'def': '[fr. āvila or is it a direct contraction of ā + vi + lulati?] to whirl round, to be agitated, to be in motion Miln.259 (+ luḷati). (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvilatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. āvila] confusion, disturbance, agitation Sn.967; Nd¹ 488. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】被搅动的情况，肮脏的情况。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvisati: {'def': '(ā + vis + a), 1. 进入，接近。 2. 着魔。 āvisi, 【过】。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + vīś] to approach, to enter Vin.IV,334; Sn.936 (aor. āvisi); J.IV,410, 496; Vism.42. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āviñjanaka: {'def': '【形】 1. 〈空〉绕行星返地轨道的。 2. 极其不拘礼节的，散漫的。 3. 为拉用的。 ~rajju, 【阴】 1. 升起门闩的绳子。 2. 搅乳牛奶用的旋转粗绳。 ~naṭṭhāna, 【中】门外悬挂的粗绳（作为提升门内的门闩）。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āviñjati: {'def': '(ā + vij + ŋ-a), 1. 如在挤奶一般地拉。 2. 搅拌，搅动。 āviñji, 【过】。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āviṭṭha: {'def': '(āvisati 的【过分】)。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvudha: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic āyudha, fr. ā + yudh to fight] an instrument to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. D III 219; M.II,100; A.IV,107, 110; Sn.1008; J.I,150; II,110; III, 467; IV,160, 283, 437; Nd² on Sn.72; Miln.8, 339; DhA.II,2; IV,207; SnA 225, 466 (°jīvika = issattha). See also āyudha. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】武器。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvuso: {'def': '【无，呼】朋友，兄弟（出家人之间礼貌上的称呼）。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Voc. pl. m.) [a contracted form of āyusmanto pl. of āyusman, of which the regular Pāli form is āyasmant, with v for y as frequently in Pāli, e. g. āvudha for āyudha] friend, a form of polite address “friend, brother, Sir”, usually in conversation between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the pl. of the verb, like bhavaṁ and bhavanto. -- Vin.II,302; D.I,151, 157; II,8; SnA 227; DhA.I,9; II,93; PvA.12, 13, 38, 208. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvuta: {'def': '[pp. of āvuṇāti in meaning of Sk. āvayati, the corresponding Sk. form being ā + uta = ota] -- 1. strung upon, tied on, fixed on to D.I,76 (suttaṁ); II,13 (id.); A.I,286 (tantāvutaṁ web); J.III,52 (valliyā); VI,346 (suttakena); DA.I,94 (°sutta). -- 2. impaled, stuck on (sūle on the pale) J.I,430; III,35; V,497; VI,105; PvA.217, 220. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² = Āvaṭa (see āvuṇāti & āvuta¹) covered, obstructed, hindered It.8 (mohena); also in phrase āvuta nivuta ophuta etc. Nd¹ 24 (ṭ) = Nd² 365 = DA.I,59. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvuttha: {'def': '[pp. of āvasati] inhabited D.II,50 (an°); S.I,33. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(āvasati 的【过分】), 已有人居住。(p59)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvuyhamāna: {'def': 'ppr. of āvuyhati (Pass. of āvahati), being conveyed or brought VvA.237 (reading uncertain). (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvuṇāti: {'def': '(ā + vu + nā), 1. 串起。 2. 固定在，装置在。 āvuṇi, 【过】。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[in form = *avṛṇoti, ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati, but in meaning = *āvayati, ā + vā to weave, thus a confusion of the two roots, the latter being merged into the former] to string upon, to fix on to (c. Loc.), to impale J.I,430; III,35; V,145; VI,105. -- Caus. II. āvuṇāpeti J.III,218 (sūle). -- pp. āvuta¹ (q. v.), whereas the other pp. āvaṭa is the true derivative of ā + vṛ. (Page 113)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvāha: {'def': '【阳】āvāhana, 【中】婚娶，婚礼。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + vah] taking in marriage, lit. carrying away to oneself, marriage D.I,99; J.VI,363; SnA 273, 448; DhA.IV,7. Often in cpd. ā° vivāha(ka) lit. leading to (one’s home) & leading away (from the bride’s home), wedding feast D.III,183 (°ka); J.I,452; VvA.109, 157. (v. l. °ka). (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvāhana: {'def': '(nt.) [ā + vshana, of vah] -- 1. = āvāha, i. e. marriage, taking a wife D.I,11 (= āvāha-karaṇa DA.I,96). -- 2. “getting up, bringing together”, i. e. a mass, a group or formation, in senā° a contingent of an army J.IV,91. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvāpa: {'def': '【阳】陶工的火炉，烤箱。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[if correct, fr. ā + vā² to blow with caus. p. -- Cp. J R A S. 1898, 750 sp.] a potter’s furnace DhA.I,177 (read for āvāsa?), 178. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvāra: {'def': '[Sk. āvāra, fr. ā + vṛ] warding off, protection, guard J VI 432 (yanta-yutta°, does it mean “cover, shield”?). ‹-› For cpd. khandh’āvāra see khandha. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvāreti: {'def': '[Sk. āvārayati, ā + Caus. of vṛ] to ward off, hold back, bar, S IV 298; Nett 99. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvāsa: {'def': '[Sk. āvāsa; ā + vas] sojourn, stay, dwelling, living; dwelling-place, residence Vin.I,92; D.III,234; S.IV,91; A II 68, 168; III,46, 262; Sn.406; Dh.73 (cp. DhA.II,77); Nd¹ 128; J.VI,105; Dhs.1122; Pug, 15, 19, 57; KhA 40; DhA.I,177 (āvāsaṁ ālimpeti: read āvāpaṁ); PvA.13, 14, 36; VvA.113; Sdhp.247. --anāvāsa (n. & adj.) uninhabited, without a home; an uninhabited place A.IV,345; J.II,77; Pv.II,3³³; PvA.80 (= anāgāra); VvA.46.

--kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different) residence (within the same boundary) Vin.II,294, 300, 306; Dpvs.IV,47, cp. V.18. --palibodha the obstruction of having a home (in set of 10 Palibodhas) KhA 39; cp. Vism.90 sq. --sappāyatā suitability of residence Vism.127. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】家，住宅。 āvāsika, 【形】居民。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āvāsika: {'def': '(adj.) [āvāsa + ika] living in, residing at home, being in (constant or fixed) residence, usually appl^d. to bhikkhus (opp. āgantuka) Vin.I,128 sq.; II,15, 170; III, 65; V,203 sq.; M.I,473; A.I,236; III,261 sq., 366; J.IV,310; Pv IV.8⁴ (= nibaddha-vasanaka PvA.267). (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āvāṭa: {'def': '【阳】深坑。(p58)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[etym.?] a hole dug in the ground, a pit, a well D.I,142 (yaññ°); J.I,99, 264; II 406; III,286; IV 46 (caturassa); VI,10; DhA.I,223; VvA.63; PvA.225. (Page 112)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āya: {'def': '[Sk. āya; ā + i] 1. coming in, entrance M.III,93. ‹-› 2. tax J.V,113. -- 3. income, earning, profit, gain (opp. vaya loss) A.IV,282 = 323; Sn.978; J.I,228; KhA 38 (in expl^n. of kāya), 82 (in etym. of āyatana); PvA.130. ‹-› 4. (āyā f.?) a lucky dice (“the incomer”) J.VI,281.

--kammika a treasurer DhA.I,184. --kusala clever in earnings Nett 20. --kosalla proficiency in money making D.III,220 (one of the three kosallas); Vbh.325. --pariccāga expediture of one’s income PvA.8. --mukha (lit.) entrance, inflow, going in D.I,74 (= āgamana-magga DA 1.78); M.II,15; A.II,166; (fig.) revenue income, money SnA 173. (Page 104)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】收入，利润。 ~kammika, 【阳】领取收入的人。 ~kosalla, 【中】聪明于增加收入。 ~mukha, 【中】流入，带来收入的。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āyamati: {'def': '[ā + yam] to stretch, extend, stretch out, draw out Miln.176, usually in ster. phrase piṭṭhi me āgilāyati tam ahaṁ āyamissāmi “my back feels weak, I will stretch it” Vin.II,200; D.III,209; M.I,354; S.IV,184; J.I,491. ‹-› Besides this in commentaries e. g. J.III,489 (mukhaṁ āyamituṁ). (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyanā: {'def': '(f.) [?] at DhsA.259 and Vism.26 is a grammarian’s construction, abstracted from f. abstr. words ending in °āyanā, e. g. kaṅkhā › kaṅkhāyanā, of which the correct expl^n. is a derivation fr. caus.-formation kaṅkhāyati › kaṅkhāy + a + nā. What the idea of Bdhgh. was in propounding his expl^n. is hard to say, perhaps he related it to i and understood it to be the same as āyāna. (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyasa: {'def': '【形】铁制的。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. āyasa, of ayas iron] made of iron S.II, 182; A.III,58; Dh.345; J.IV,416; V,81; Vv 84⁵ (an°? cp. the rather strange expl^n. at VvA.335). (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyasakya: {'def': '(nt.) dishonour, disgrace, bad repute A.IV,96; J.V,17; VvA.110; usually in phrase °ṁ pāpuṇāti to fall into disgrace Th.1, 292; J.II,33 = 271; III,514. [Bdhgh. on A.IV,96 explains it as ayasaka + ya with guṇa of the initial, cp. ārogya]. (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyasmant: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant, the P. form showing assimilation of u to a] lit. old, i. e. venerable; used, either as adj. or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some standing (cp. the semantically identical thera). It occurs usually in Nom. āyasmā and is expl^d. in Nd by typical formula “piya-vacanaṁ garu°, sagārava-sappaṭissâdhivacanaṁ”, e. g. Nd¹ 140, 445; Nd² 130 on var. Sn.loci (e. g. 814, 1032, 1040, 1061, 1096). -- Freq. in all texts, of later passages see SnA 158; PvA.53, 54, 63, 78. -- See also āvuso. (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyasmantu: {'def': '【形】庄严的，值得尊敬的。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āyata: {'def': '[Sk. āyata, pp. of ā + yam, cp. āyamati] -- 1. (adj.) outstretched, extended, long, in length (with numeral) D.III,73 (ñātikkhaya, prolonged or heavy?); M.I,178 (dīghato ā°; tiriyañ ca vitthata); J.I,77, 273 (tettiṁs’-aṅgul’āyato khaggo); III,438; Vv 84¹⁵ (°aṁsa; cp. expl^n. at VvA.339); SnA 447; DhsA.48; PvA.152 (dāṭhā fangs; lomā hair), 185 (°vaṭṭa); Sdhp.257. -- 2. (n.) a bow J.III,438.

--agga having its point (end) stretched forward, i. e. in the future (see āyati) It.15, 52. --paṇhin having long eye-lashes (one of the signs of a Mahāpurisa) D.II,17 = III,143. --pamha a long eye-lash Th.2, 384 (= dīghapakhuma ThA.250). (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】长的，延长。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āyataka: {'def': '(adj.) [= āyata] -- 1. long. extended, prolonged, kept up, lasting Vin.II,108 (gītassara); A.III,251 (id.); J.I,362. -- 2. sudden, abrupt, Instr. °ena abruptly Vin.II,237. (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyatana: {'def': '入,处,根尘(六内处)(六根)(眼耳鼻舌身意)(六外处)(六尘--色,声,香,味,触,法)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【中】界，范围，区域，感觉器官，位置。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. āyatana, not found in the Vedas; but freq. in BSk. From ā + yam, cp. āyata. The pl. is āyatanā at S.IV,70. -- For full definition of term as seen by the Pāli Commentators see Bdhgh’s explⁿ at DA.I,124, 125, with which cp. the popular etym. at KhA 82: “āyassa vā tananato āyatassa vā saṁsāradukkhassa nayanato āyatanāni” and at Vism.527 “āye tanoti āyatañ ca nayatī ti ā.”] -- 1. stretch, extent, reach, compass, region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position, occasion (corresponding to Bdhgh’s definition at DA.I,124 as “samosaraṇa”) D.III,241, 279 (vimutti°); S.II,41, 269; IV,217; V,119 sq., 318. sq.; A.III,141 (ariya°); V,61 (abhibh°, q. v.) Sn.406 (rajass° “haunt of passion” = rāgādi-rajassa uppatti-deso SnA 381); J.I,80 (raj°). Freq. in phrase araññ° a lonely spot, a spot in the forest J.I,173; VvA.301; PvA.42, 54. -- 2. exertion, doing, working, practice, performance (comprising Bdhgh’s definition at DA.I,124 as paññatti), usually --°, viz. kamm° Nd¹ 505; Vbh.324, 353; kasiṇ° A.V,46 sq., 60; Ps.I,28; titth° A.I,173, 175; Vbh.145, 367; sipp° (art, craft) D.I,51; Nd² 505; Vbh.324, 353; cp. an° non-exertion, indolence, sluggishness J.V,121. -- 3. sphere of perception or sense in general, object of thought, sense-organ & object; relation, order. -- Cpd. p. 183 says rightly: “āyatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense-organs (the mind being regarded as 6^th sense) and sense objects”. -- These āyatanāni (relations, functions, reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikāni) and outer (bāhirāni), and comprise the foll.: (a) ajjhatt°: 1. cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghāna nose, 4. jivhā tongue, 5. kāya body, 6. mano mind; (b) bāh°: 1. rūpa visible object, 2. sadda sound, 3. gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phoṭṭhabba tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object. -- For details as regards connotation & application see Dhs.trsl. introduction li sq. Cpd. 90 n. 2; 254 sq. -- Approximately covering this meaning (3) is Bdhgh’s definition of āyatana at DA.I,124 as sañjāti and as kāraṇa (origin & cause, i. e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations). See also Nd² under rūpa for further classifications. -- For the above mentioned 12 āyatanāni see the foll. passages: D.II,302 sq.; III,102, 243; A.III,400; V,52; Sn.373 (cp. SnA 366); Ps.I,7, 22, 101, 137; II, 181, 225, 230; Dhs.1335; Vbh.401 sq.; Nett 57, 82; Vism.481; ThA.49, 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at S.I,113, II.3; IV,100, 174 sq.; It.114; Vbh.135 sq., 294; Nett 13, 28, 30; Vism.565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Nett 69; of 4 at D.II,112, 156; of 2 at D.II,69. -- Here also belongs ākās’ānañc’āyatana, ākiñcaññ° etc. (see under ākāsa etc. and s. v.), e. g. at D.I,34 sq., 183; A.IV,451 sq.; Vbh.172, 189, 262 sq.; Vism.324 sq. -- Unclassified passages: M.I,61; II,233; III,32, 216, 273; S.I,196; II,6, 8, 24, 72 sq.; III,228; IV,98; V,426; A.I,113, 163, 225; III,17, 27, 82, 426; IV,146, 426; V,30, 321, 351, 359; Nd¹ 109, 133, 171, 340; J.I,381 (paripuṇṇa°); Vbh.412 sq. (id.).

--uppāda birth of the āyatanas (see above 3) Vin.I,185. --kusala skilled in the ā. M.III,63. --kusalatā skill in the spheres (of sense) D.III,212; Dhs.1335. --ṭṭha founded in the sense-organs Ps.I,132; II,121. (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyatanika: {'def': '【形】界的，区域的。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āyatana] belonging to the sphere of (some special sense, see āyatana 3) S.IV,126 (phass° niraya & sagga). (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyati: {'def': '【阴】未来。 ~ka, 【形】未来的。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. ā + yam, cp. Sk. āyati] “stretching forth”, extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in Acc. āyatiṁ (adv.) in future Vin.II,89, 185; III,3; Sn.49; It.115 (T. reads āyati but cp. p. 94 where T. āyatiṁ, v. l. āyati); J.I,89; V,431; DA.I,236. (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyatika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] future S.I,142. (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyatikā: {'def': '【阴】管，水管。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [of āyataka] a tube, waterpipe Vin.II,123. (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyatta: {'def': '[Sk. āyatta, pp. of ā + yat]. -- 1. striving, active, ready, exerted J.V,395 (°mana = ussukkamana C.). ‹-› 2. striven after, pursued J.I,341. -- 3. dependent on Vism.310 (assāsa-passāsa°); Nett 194; Sdhp.477, 605. (Page 105)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】持有，依靠的。【中】所有物。(p54)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āyoga: {'def': '[Sk. āyoga, of ā + yuj; cp. āyutta] -- 1. binding, bandage Vin.II,135; Vv 33⁴¹; VvA.142 (°paṭṭa). -- 2. yoke Dhs.1061 (avijj°), 1162. -- 3. ornament, decoration Nd¹ 226; J.III,447 (°vatta, for v. l. °vanta?). -- 4. occupation, devotion to, pursuit, exertion D.I,187; Dh.185 (= payoga-karaṇa DhA.III,238). -- 5. (t. t.) obligation, guarantee(?) SnA 179. -- Cp. sam°. (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 热爱。 2. 努力。 3. 绷带。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āyu: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic āyus; Av. āyu, gradation form of same root as Gr. ai]w/n “aeon”, ai]έn always; Lat. aevum, Goth. aiws. Ohg. ēwa, io always; Ger. ewig eternal; Ags. āē eternity, ā always (cp. ever and aye)] life, vitality, duration of life, longevity D.III,68, 69, 73, 77; S.III,143 (usmā ca); IV,294; A.I,155; II,63, 66 (addh°); III,47; IV,76, 139; Sn.694, 1019; It.89; J.I,197 (dīgh°); Vv 55⁵ (cp. VvA.247 with its definition of divine life as comprising 30 600 000 years); Vism.229 (length of man’s āyu = 100 years); Dhs.19, 82, 295, 644, 716; Sdhp.234, 239, 258. -- Long or divine life, dibbaṁ āyu is one of the 10 attributes of ādhipateyya or majesty (see ṭhāna), thus at Vin.I,294; D.III,146; S.IV,275 sq.; A.I,115; III, 33; IV,242, 396; Pv.II,9⁵⁹ (= jīvitaṁ PvA.136).

--ūhā see āyūhā. --kappa duration of life Miln.141; DhA.I,250. --khaya decay of life (cp. jīvita-kkhaya) D.I,17 (cp. DA.I,110); III,29. --pamāṇa span or measure of life time D.II,3; A.I,213, 267; II,126 sq.; IV,138, 252 sq., 261; V,172; Pug.16; Vbh.422 sq.; SnA 476. --pariyanta end of life It.99; Vism.422. --saṅkhaya exhaustion of life or lifetime Dpvs.V,102. --saṅkhāra (usually pl. °ā) constituent of life, conditions or properties resulting in life, vital principle D.II,106; M.I,295 sq.; S.II,266; A.IV,311 sq.; Ud.64; J.IV,215; Miln.285; Vism.292; DhA.I,129; PvA.210. Cp. BSk. āyuḥ-saṁskāra Divy 203. (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】年龄，寿命。 ~ka, 【形】有…的年龄。 ~kappa, 【阳】生命期。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】寿终。 ~saṅkhaya, 【阳】善终。 ~saṅkhāra, 【阳】生命的法则，寿命的长度。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Āyudha: {'def': '【中】武器。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'is the Vedic form of the common Pāli form āvudha weapon, and occurs only spuriously at D.I,9 (v. l. āvudha). (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyuka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. āyu] -- being of life; having a life or age A.IV,396 (niyat°); VvA.196 (yāvatāyukā dibbasampatti divine bliss lasting for a lifetime). Esp. freq. in comb^n. with dīgha (long) and appa (short) as dīghāyuka A.IV,240; PvA.27; appāyuka A.IV,247; PvA.103; both at Vism.422. In phrase vīsati-vassasahass’āyukesu manussesu at the time when men lived 20 000 years D.II,5--12 (see Table at Dial. II.6); DhA.II,9; PvA.135; dasa-vassasahass’āyukesu manussesu (10 000 years) PvA.73; cattāḷīsa° DhA.I,103; catusaṭṭhi-kapp’āyukā subhakiṇhā Vism.422. (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyukin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āyu] = āyuka; in appāyukin short lived Vv 41⁶. (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyusmant: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant; see also the regular P. form āyasmant] having life or vitality PvA.63 (āyusmāviññāṇa feeling or sense of vitality; is reading correct?). (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyussa: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. *āyuṣya] connected with life, bringing (long) life A.III,145 dhamma). (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyuta: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. ayuta, pp. of ā + yu, yuvati] -- 1. connected with, endowed, furnished with Th.1, 753 (dve pannaras’āyuta due to twice fifteen); Sn.301 (nārī-varagaṇ° = °saṁyutta SnA 320); Pv.II,12⁴ (nānā-saragaṇ° = °yutta PvA.157). -- 2. seized, conquered, in dur° hard to conquer, invincible J.VI,271 (= paccatthikehi durāsada C.). (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyutta: {'def': '(āyuñjati 的【过分】), 已把…套上轭，已连接，已投入于。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. āyukta; pp. of ā + yuj] -- 1. yoked, to connected with, full of Pv.I,10¹⁴ (tejas’āyuta T., but PvA.52 reads °āyutta and expl^ns. as samāyutta); PvA.157 (= ākiṇṇa of Pv.II,12⁴). -- 2. intent upon, devoted to S.I,67. nāyuttaṁ (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyuttaka: {'def': '【阳】代理人，受托人。(p55)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [āyutta + ka] one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer J.I,230 (°vesa); IV,492; DhA.I,101, 103, 180. (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Āyuvant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. āyu] advanced in years, old, of age Th.1, 234. (Page 106)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】